ANALYSIS OF SPECIALIZED PESTICIDE PROBLEMS

                         INVERTEBRATE CONTROL AGENTS-EFFICACY TEST METHODS
                                                        VOLUME II
                                                       FOLIAR TREATMENTS II
                                       (FIELD CROPS, FORAGE CROPS, RANGELAND,
                                          VEGETABLES-FIELD AND GREENHOUSE)
 .
JANUARY
  1977
                                                         EPA-540/10-77-008

-------
                            REPORT To THE
                   ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
             ANALYSIS OF SPECIALIZED PESTICIDE PROBLEMS
         INVERTEBRATE CONTROL AGENTS - EFFICACY TEST METHODS
                              VOLUME II
                        FOLIAR TREATMENTS II
               (FIELD CROPS., FORAGE CROPS, RANGELAND,
                  VEGETABLES - FIELD & GREENHOUSE)
     The work upon which this publication is based was performed in
whole or in part under Contract No. 68-01-2457 with the Office of
Pesticide Programs, Environmental Protection Agency.

-------
                           Report To The
                  Environmental Protection Agency

                              By The

             American Institute of Biological Sciences
                     Arlington, Virginia 22209
                         EPA REVIEW NOTICE

This Report has been reviewed by the Office of Pesticide Programs,
Criteria and Evaluation Division,  and approved for publication.
Approval does not signify that the contents necessarily reflect
the views and policies of the Environmental Protection Agency, nor
does mention of trade names or commercial products constitute
endorsement of recommendation for  use.

-------
                        FOLIAR TREATMENTS II • TASK GROUP
     (Field Crops, Forage Crops, Rangeland, Vegetable - Field
                                                                Greenhouse)
                                    Chairman:

                              PR. WV J. LEP8ETTER
                           Auburn University Extension
PR. EPWARP J. ARMBRUST
Illinois State Natural History Survey
                                                 PR. ELLIS W. HUPPLEST0N
                                                 New Mexico State University
PR. ROV HALE
Owen T. Rice
               Son
PR. JOHN C. OWENS
Pioneer Hybrid International Co.
PR. RICHARP N. HOFMASTER
Virginia Truck Experiment Station
                                                 PR. FLOyp SMITH
                                                 USDA-Agricultural Research Service
                               PR. PAl/IP L. WATSON
                          Velsicol Chemical Corporation
EPA Observer:
MR. ROGER PIERPONT
Criteria and Evaluation Division
                                                 AIBS Coordinators:
                                                 MS. PATRICIA RUSSELL
                                                 MR. PONALP R.'BEEM

-------
                            FOLIAR TREATMENTS II
                   (Field Crops, Forage Crops, Rangeland,
                      Vegetables - Field & Greenhouse)

                              Table of Contents
                                                                      Page

Introduction 	  	   1

General Methods	   2.

Field Crops	   6
  Corn	   6
    Southwestern Corn Borer  	   8
    European Corn Borer  	   8
    Corn Earworm	   9
    Fall Armyworm, Beet Armyworm, Corn Earworm	10
    Corn Rootworms (adults)  .....  	  10
  Cotton	11
    Boll Weevil	11
    Bollworm and Tobacco Budworm	13
    Lygus	15
    Mites	17
    Pink Bollworm	18
  Sorghum	21
    Greenbug	21
    Sorghum Midge  	  23
    Banks Grass Mite	 .  24
  Soybeans	25
    Podworm, Stinkbugs and Defoliating Insects 	  25
    Mexican Bean Beetle and Bean Leaf Beetle	27
    Southern Green Stinkbug  	  29
  Sugar Beets	  30
    Beet Armyworm and Fall Armyworm	30
  Sugarcane	32
    Sugarcane Borer  	 .....  32
  Sunflowers	34
    Sunflower Moth	34
  Tobacco	36
    Tobacco Budworm,  Tobacco Hornworm and Cabbage Looper 	  36
    Green Peach Aphid and Tobacco Flea Beetle	38
  Wheat	39
    Greenbug	39
  Winter Wheat 	  40
    Pale Western Cutworm	40

Forage Crops 	  42
    Alfalfa Weevil and Egyptian Alfalfa Weevil 	  42
    Weevil Parasites  	  45
    Spittlebugs	46
    Potato Leafhopper  	  47

-------
                        Table of Contents  (Continued)
                                                                      Page

    Aphids	47
    European Chafer,  White Grubs,  Clover  Root  Borer,  Sitona Species   .   47
    Seed Chalcids and Plant Bugs	•   48

Rangeland	•	
    Grasshoppers	•>	   49
    Range Caterpillar	52
    Harvester Ants	54
    Imported Fire Ant	•   56
    Black Grass Bugs	58
    Chigger (affecting Turkeys)   	   59

Vegetables (Field Grown)  	   62
  Cruciferae	62
    Cabbage Looper (#1)  .	62
    Harlequin Bug	65
    Flea Beetles	66
  Cruciferae and Head Lettuce	68
    Aphids and Thrips	68
    Cabbage Looper (#2)  .	71
  Cucurbits  	  .........   73
    Cucumber Beetles  	   73
    Squash Bug	76
    Squash Vine Borer	77
    Pickleworm and Melonworm	77
    Melon Aphid	78
    Cabbage Looper 	   78
    Mites	'	79
  Irish Potatoes 	  .....   80
    Colorado Potato Beetle 	   80
    Potato Flea Beetle	   83
    Potato Leafhopper and Other Leafhoppers  	   83
    European Corn Borer	84
    Potato Psyllid	85
    Aphids	86
    Potato Tuberworm	87
  Lettuce	89
    European Lettuce Root Aphid	89
  Lima Beans	91
    Lygus Bug	91
  Peas	93
    Pea Aphid	93
    Pea Weevil	95
  Peppers	96
    European Corn Borer	96
    Green Peach Aphid (#1)	 .  98
    Pepper Maggot	99
    Green Peach Aphid (#2)	100

-------
                        Table of Contents (Continued)
                                                                      Page

  Snap Beans, Lima Beans and Southern Peas	101
    Mexican Bean Beetle	101
    Bean Leaf Beetle	103
    Bean Aphid	103
    Cowpea Curculio  . . .  ;	103
    Leafhoppers	104
  Sweet Corn	105
    Corn Earworm .	105
    Fall Armyworm	106
    Corn Flea Beetle	107
    European Corn Borer	108
  Tomatoes	110
    Tomato Fruitworm 	 110
    Colorado Potato Beetle 	 Ill
    Potato Flea Beetle	Ill
    Aphids	112
  Tomatoes, Poled  	 113
    Tomato Fruitworm and Tomato Pinworm  	 113

Vegetables (Greenhouse)  	 115
    Aphids	117
    Beetles	118
    Cutworms	119
    Garden Symphylan 	 120
    Greenhouse Whitefly  	 123
    Leafminer	125
    Leaf Eating Caterpillars 	 128
    Slugs and Snails	130
    Spider Mites 	 133
    Tomato Pinworm 	 135

-------
                                INTRODUCTION
     The primary purpose in testing new insecti .des and acaricides in foliar
applications to various crops is to establish their effectiveness and usefulness.
This report is concerned with testing chemicals in foliar applications to field
crops, forage crops, rangeland, and vegetable crops (field and greenhouse), to
establish their efficaciousness in protecting these crops from economic injury
by insects and mites.  In addition, test methods should take into consideration
environmental involvement from such applications and the effect of pesticides on
beneficial organisms.  Test methods should be broad enough to provide information
on the use of dosages of pesticides often required for pest population regulation
in integrated pest management systems.

     Foliar applications of insecticides and acaricides are usually made at
recommended periods for control of the pest or pest complex present on the crop,
normally during a period of pest population increase.   Initially, test materials
should be applied alone rather than in combination with other ingredients such as
fungicides to permit evaluation of independent effects.  Application equipment
and methods employed should give adequate and reasonably uniform coverage approxi-
mating field practice.  Test materials should be in one or more of the commercial
type formulations such as wettable powder, emulsifiable concentrate, ULV, etc.
It is preferable to apply pesticides at three or more dosages approximating minimum
and maximum rates.  Initially, new pesticides should be tested in small, replicated
field plots to permit statistical evaluation of results.  Large scale field trials
approximating commercial use, preferably replicated, and compared with a standard
treatment should be conducted to determine practicability and compatibility with
the environment.  Any auxiliary spray materials including spreaders and stickers
used in combination with test chemicals should be named and used according to
manufacturers recommendations.

     The methods described herein are not to be considered exclusive of other
methods.  Certain situations may require special methods, and new methods may be
developed which improve on present ones.  With some pests several acceptable
methods of evaluating pesticides are available, but only the more common ones are
presented.  The suggested methods are purposely kept broad to cover the wide range
of conditions which may be encountered in the diverse climatic, pest and cultural
conditions of different growing regions.  More specific information may be obtained
by referring to the literature citations.

-------
                                      —2—
                               GENERAL METHODS
     The following general methods are appropriate for the evaluation of the
efficacy of chemical pesticides in foliar applications (for certain pests,
applications to other p^arts of the plant and/or soil in which they grow) to:
(1) Field Crops,  (2) Forage Crops, (3) Rangeland, (4) Vegetables  (Field Grown),
and (5) Vegetables (Greenhouse).  Specific variations to these methods are
identified throughout the report under the individual pest or pest group in each
section.
                           Small Scale Field Tests

     Pesticides in the early stages of development (prior to establishment of an
experimental tolerance) are usually tested on small, replicated plots to develop
a wide range of information on performance and phytotoxicity.  Small plots are
used to insure thorough and uniform coverage of the plants, and to minimize the
crop contaminated with experimental^materials.  Crops treated with materials in
this stage of development must normally be destroyed, following completion of the
tests.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—Plants should be a uniform size and vigor, and
plant size and planting distance should allow separation into units which may be
treated separately.  Varieties chosen should be typical of those common to the
area.  Pest density and stage of development should be relatively uniform through-
out the test site.  Preferably the pest population should be increasing at the
time of treatment.
     Plot Size and Design:—These will vary somewhat with the individual pests,
but a minimum of 3 replicates per treatment should be used where uniformity occurs.
The number of replicates should be increased where plant age, variety, rootstock,
plant vigor or pest populations vary.  The use of randomized blocks, latin squares
or split blocks is desirable for later analysis of results.  In some situations
it may be desirable to use buffer plots around the test plots to minimize drift
from treatment of adjacent plots.


     Applications and Equipment;—Apply at recommended periods for best control
of the pest or pest complex.  The experimental materials should be applied alone
initially rather than in combination with other ingredients  such as fungicides
so that their independent effects may be evaluated.  Apply test materials with
equipment and methods generally known to give adequate and uniform coverage
approximating that in field use, and appropriate to the pest and crop involved.
Apply the test materials in one or more of the commercial type of formulations,
such as wettable powder, emulsifiable concentrate, ULV, etc.  The pH can affect
the performance of a pesticide and should be given due consideration.

-------
                                    -3-
     The selection of a dosage will depend on available data but it is preferable
to apply materials at two or more dosages approximating minimum and maximum rates.
Where practical, both a standard treatment (one which has a background of informa-
tion on its performance) and an untreated check plot should be included for com-
parison with experimental materials.

     The number of trials with each candidate pesticide will vary considerably,
but an adequate number of trials should be conducted to permit accumulation of
data on:  (1) Timing and dosage for best control; (2) Performance on various pest
densities and stages; (3) Phytotoxicity to various cultivars at different growth
stages; (4) Effects on non-target species; and, (5) Effects of weather on performance.

     Equipment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after each use.  Between
each treatment, the entire spray system should be operated with water (or a com-
patible substitute) until only clear water is sprayed.  If two or more rates of the
same formulation of the same pesticide are used, begin the application with the
lowest rate in order to minimize contamination.


     Sampling;—Sampling methods, counting methods, methods of presenting results
including yields and, in certain cases, plot size and design will differ with
specific pests or pest groups and will be discussed under the individual pest or
pest group.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data;—If a question of relative effectiveness of
treatments occurs, an analysis of variance and multiple range test or other appro-
priate statistical analysis should be conducted to determine the statistical
reliability of the differences between treatments.  If treatment means alone are
provided, they should be accompanied by the standard deviation.

     The following information should be included when reporting test results:

     Name and address of investigator.
     Product name and formulation used, indicating active ingredient.
     Crop (variety) treated.
     Location of the test [soil type (if applicable) and soil moisture].
     Type irrigation used (furrow or sprinkler).
     Plot size.
     Number of replications.
     Rate of application - a.i. per hectare.
     Finished spray volume per hectare.
     Method of application (type of equipment, type of spray, coverage).
     Stage of crop growth.
     Treatment dates.
     Harvest date.
     How samples were taken.
     Number of samples taken.
     Percent infestation.
     Percent control.
     Phytotoxicity (type and degree of).
     Comments regarding unusual test conditions or performance.

-------
                                     -4-
     Temperature and general weather conditions at time of treatment.
     Rainfall or any unusual weather after the treatment.
     Include comment on performance as related to commercial acceptability (in"
eluding effects on yield).
     Statistical analysis.
     References:—Pertinent references are cited.
                           Large Scale Field Tests

     By the time a pesticide receives a temporary or experimental tolerance or
an exemption from a tolerance, several small scale field tests have been conducted
and a considerable amount of data has been collected on efficacy, phytotoxicity
and effects on non-target organisms.  It is then desirable to observe its perfor-
mance under typical commercial conditions.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Several field plots should be selected which are
representative of varieties, ages of plants, cultural practices and pest populations
which are commonly encountered throughout the area.


     Plot Size and Design:—Plots suitable in size for commercial application
should be used.  These should have dimensions large enough to avoid drift problems.


     Application and Equipment:—Compounds reaching this stage of development should
be tested under a range of application techniques.  This should include dilute and
concentrate air-carrier applications, and aerial application if this method is to
be used commercially.  The test material may be combined with other commonly used
agricultural chemicals to substantiate any previous compatibility information.

     The formulation and dosage used should be consistent with probable commercial
use in the area.  The experimental pesticide should be compared with a standard
treatment applied to an adjacent area of the planting.  Where possible, comparison
with a small, untreated check plot is desirable.

     The number of trials will vary somewhat with the pest and how readily infesta-
tions may be found; however, 3 to 5 large-scale trials are usually adequate.

     Equipment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after each use.  Between
each treatment, the entire spray system should be operated with water  (or a compatible
substitute) until only clear water is sprayed.  If two or more rates of the same
formulation of the same pesticide are used, begin the application with the lowest
rate in order to minimize contamination.


     Sampling:—Sampling methods, counting methods and methods of presenting results,
including yields, will differ with specific pests or pest groups and will be pre-
sented under each pest or pest group.

-------
                                     -5-
     Analysis and Reporting of Data;—Analysis" of the results of large-scale field
trials may not be practical because of the lack of true replication.

     See small scale field tests for reporting of data.


     References:—Pertinent references are cited.

-------
                                     -6-
                              FIELD CROPS
                           CORN,  Zea mays L.

     The following general parameters are applicable to the testing of
insecticides for efficacy on corn,  Zea mays L.  Following this section, there
are additional suggested guidelines for evaluating foliar insecticides for the
control of specific insect pests  of corn.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—The corn variety selected must be agronomically
adapted for the specific growing  conditions experienced in the geographical
location of the test site.  The corn variety should be susceptible to feeding
by the test organism (e.g., insect, mite).

     The field, or test site within the field, should have uniform growing
conditions  (e.g., soil type and available moisture).  A single corn variety should
be utilized throughout the test plot.  If large-scale plots preclude a single
variety for the entire test site, a single variety must be utilized within each
block of the experimental design.  Uniformity of corn varieties is necessary to
avoid masking of treatment effects through significant variety X invertebrate
preference  interactions.

     Natural or artifical infestations of the test invertebrate may be used
depending upon  the specific conditions of the experiment.  Extreme care must be
exercised to ensure that laboratory reared invertebrate pests retain their
preference  for  the host plant rather than prefer an artifical diet.  The entire
test site should be protected from pesticide drift originating from commercial
applications of pesticides on adjoining fields.

     The minimum plot size for small-plot ground equipment or high clearance
sprayers is 3-4 rows x 15m (ca. 50 ft,).  When using minimum plot size, data must
be collected only from the center row(s) in order to minimize the effect of
pesticide drift from adjoining plots.  Because of the danger of drift in small
plots,  surface  winds must be monitored closely and spraying must cease when
pesticide drift is likely to mask treatment effects.  When pesticide drift is
unavoidable, plot width and length must be sufficiently large enough to eliminate
drift  into  that portion of each replication (block) from which data will be collect-
ed.

     Minimum plot size for aerially applied pesticides is 3 swath widths x 300 m
 (ca. 1000 ft.).  Data should be collected only from the center 2 rows of the middle
swath  in  order  to minimize drift effect  from adjoining plots.  The two remaining
swaths  will serve as buffer zones.  Surface winds often cause aerially applied
pesticides  to  drift great distances.  When using minimum plot size, spraying
should  cease when surface winds cause the pesticides to drift past the two buffer
zones  and into  the middle swath.  When drift  is unavoidable, plot size must be
increased to  a  size large enough to eliminate drift into that portion of each swath
from which  data will be collected.

-------
                                     -7-
     Experimental Design:—A randomized complete block is the most widely used
experimental design for evaluating pesticides against foliar arthropod pests of
corn.

     A minimum of three replications of treatments should be employed for either
ground or aerially applied pesticides at a single location.  When the same
experiment is conducted at two or more locations, two replications of treatments
at each location will yield valid experimental results if the data are analyzed
in a combined analysis of variance.  Three or more replications are needed,
however, if single locations are to be analyzed individually.  Generally it is
desirable to test at several locations (environments) and to utilize different
corn varieties in order to detect treatment x environment interactions, treatment
x variety interactions, and treatment x variety x environment interactions.

     Untreated controls and the recognized standard insecticide trea'tment(s)
should be included in each replication (block) of the experimental design to
provide bases of comparison.  When it is impossible to have untreated controls
because of the large acreage involved, it should be sufficient to compare the
treatments with one or more acceptable standards.


     Application and Equipment:—Equipment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after each use.  Between each treatment, the entire spray system should be operated
with water  (or a compatible substitute) until only clear water is sprayed.  If two
or more rates of the same formulation of the same pesticide are used, begin the
application with the lowest rate in order to minimize contamination.

     Many of the organic phosphate insecticides breakdown rapidly in alkaline
water  (pH above 7.0).  A testing kit can be used to determine the pH of the water
supply and, in cities, this information is available from the water department.

     At the initial testing stage, 2-3 rates should be applied.  When an optimum
rate has been established and testing is in the final stages of product development,
then the optimum rate should be used.

     The finished spray volume per hectare (acre) varies with crop growth stage
and  application method.  5-47 1/ha  (ca. 0.5-5 gal/acre) usually are applied by air.
Higher volumes can be applied by modification of the aircraft spray system.

     95-568 1/ha (ca. 10-60 gallons/acre) are usually applied by ground equipment,
such as small-plot sprayers and high-clearance sprayers.  Higher volumes can be
applied if necessary.


     Analysis of Data:—Data should be subjected to analysis of variance and if
significant differences are detected, multiple comparisons  of treatment means
should be conducted with a seperation test such as Duncan's Multiple Range  or
Tukey's Test.

-------
Southwestern Corn Borer, Diatraea grandiose11a (Dyar)

     The stem of the corn plant is internally girdled by the 2nd generation larvae
of this insect causing stem breakage and harvesting problems.

     The stage of crop at application should be whenever the 2nd generation eggs
are oviposited in sufficient quantities to warrent treatment, usually tassel and
silk stages.

     The stage of insect at application is the egg or early larval stage.

     The intervals between application are 7 to 15 days, until oviposition ceases.


     Sampling:—Dissect 10 plants from each treatment in each replication  (block)
for number of feeding tunnels of 2nd generation borers.

     Examine plants from each treatment in each replication  (block) for stalk
girdling and record as percent girdling estimates.

     Obtain yield samples at physiological plant maturity by manually harvesting
at  least 0.0004 ha  (0.001 acre) from each treatment in each replication (block).
If  mechanical equipment is used, recheck each harvested plot for dropped ears
due to  insect feeding and record as percent of harvested ears.

     Harvested  ears should be examined individually for southwestern corn borer
damage.


                               References

Arbuthnot,  K.D., and R.R. Walton.  1954.  Insecticides for control of the
     southwestern corn borer.  J. Soon. Entomol.  47:707-708.

Keaster, A.J.   1972.  Evaluation of insecticides for control of the southwestern
     corn borer  in Southeastern Missouri 1967-1969.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  65:563-566.
 European Corn Borer, Ostr-in-la nub-Halis

      Leaves  are  damaged  by  larvae  feeding  in the whorl;  tunnelling  is  seen in the
 stalk;  stalks break, ears fall due to  feeding  in the  ear shank.   Earlier  generation
 larvae  destroy food-conducting vessels with consequent weakening  of the plant,  re-
 duction of ear size  and  weight,  of number  of grains and  grain weight.  Later
 generation larval cause  loss of  ears due to ear dropping and harvest efficiency is
 reduced.

      The stage of the  crop  at application  should be whenever eggs are  oviposited
 in sufficient quantities to justify treatment.  Artificial  infestation of eggs  should
 be timed so  as to properly  coincide with natural oviposition.  Usually early
 whorl stage  for  first  generation and tassel to silk stages  for second  generation.

      The stage of insect at application is the egg or early larval  stage.

      Often only  one  application  is made, a second application may be made 7-10  days
 following the first  application.

-------
                                     -9-
     Sampling:—Evaluation procedures for the leaf-feeding first-generation borer
consist of a visual plant rating scale of 1-9 (l=little or no feeding damage and
9=highly damaged) for at least 10 randomly selected plants from each treatment
per replication (block).

     Stalk evaluations are made for the second generation borer and at least 10
plants from each treatment per replication (block) are dissected for number of
feeding tunnels.

     Yield samples are obtained at physiological plant maturity by manually
harvesting at least 0.0004 ha (0.001 acre) from each treatment in each replication
(block).  If mechanical harvesting equipment is used, recheck each harvested plot
for dropped ears due to borer feeding and record as percent of harvested ears.

     Harvested ears should be examined individually for European corn borer damage.


                              References

Berry, E.G., J.E. Cambell, C.R. Edwards, J.A. Harding, W.G. Lovely, and G.M.
     McWhorter.  1972.  Further field test's of chemicals for control of the
     European corn borer.  J. Eoon. Entomol.   65:1113-16.

Cox, H.C., and T.A. Brindley.  1958.  Time of insecticide application in European
     corn borer control.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  51:133-7.

Harding, J.A., W.G. Lovely, and R.C. Dyar.  1968.  Field tests of chemicals for
     control of the European corn borer.  J.  Eoon. Entomol.  61:1427-30.
Corn Earworm, Eeliothis zea

     The principal damage is caused by larval feeding in the corn ears resulting
in loss of kernels primarily at the distal end of the ear and secondary contamina-
tion of the ear by pathogenic organisms.  The larvae also may occasionally feed as
budworms in the whorl of the corn plant causing destruction of leaf tissue.  Usually
it is not economically feasible to treat field corn for corn earworm control.

     If adult moths are present and ovipositing, the first application should be
made at silking or 2-3 days prior to silking, or when 7-10% of the ears are silking.

     The stage of insect at application is the egg or early larval stage.

     Applications may range from as often as once every 24 hours to once every 3
days until the silks turn brown.

     Sampling:—United States Standards for U.S. fancy grade fresh sweet corn per-
mit no more than 10% damaged ears from all sources.  The most common method of
collecting corn earworm infestation data is to examine 10 or more individual ears
from each treatment per replication (block) at harvest.  Data are recorded as
percent of injury-free ears, percent of worm-free ears, or percent of worm-infested
ears.

-------
                                    -10-
                              RefeTenoes

Janes, M.J., and G.L. Greene.  1972.  Corn earworm control on sweet corn ears  in
     Central and South Florida, 1969-70.  J. Boon. Entomol.  65:521-522.

Keaster, A.J.  1969.  Corn earworm control on sweet corn in Southeastern Missouri,
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  62:1513-14.
Fall Armyworm, Spodoptera fruqiyerda, Beet Armyworm, S. exiqua,  Corn Earworm,
Eelioth-is zea

     These insects feed in the whorl of the corn plant causing  severe destruction
of leaf tissue and occasionally  migrate to the ears when  the plants tassel.   The
principal budworm is the fall armyworm with beet armyworms  and  corn  earworms  some-
times present.

     The stage of the crop at application is early whorl to tassel.   The degree of
control on whorl stage corn is not so important as for the  ears.

     The stage of insect at application is early to mid-larval  stages.

     Applications range from 2-22 with intervals ranging from 2-11 days  apart.


     Sampling:—Counts of at least 10 randomly selected corn plants  are  made  in
the  center of each treatment per replication  (block).  The  results are expressed
as percent of injury-free or worm-infested plants.  Observations are made from
1-7  days after the last insecticide  application.


                              Reference

Greene,  G.L., and M.J. Janes.  1970.  Control of budworms  on sweet corn  in
     central and south Florida.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  63:579-582.
 Western Corn Rootworm,  D-LdbTot-Loa  virgifera,  Northern Corn Rootworm,  D.  longioornis,
 Southern Corn Rootworm, D.  undea-impunGtata  howardi

      Adult corn rootworms  feeding  in  large  numbers  (10+ beetles per ear)  will eat
 corn silks and may prevent pollination.   The  adults will oviposit in the field,
 and if the field is planted to corn during  the next growing season infestations
 of western and northern corn rootworm larvae  are highly probable.

      The stage of the crop at application is  the silk stage when silks are visible
 and pollen is being shed.

      The stage of insect at application is  the adult.

      Usually only one application  is  made.  When silking intervals are prolonged
 or when rainfall may interfer with the first  application, a second application may
 be necessary.

-------
                                    -11-
     Sampling:—Adult counts of at least 10 randomly selected corn plants are made
in the center of each treatment per replication (block).  Counts are made prior to
the first application, 24 hours following application, 72 hours following application,
1 week following application, and 2 weeks following application.  Sticky traps may
be placed in each treatment per replication (block) to augment or to replace the
individual plant counts.

     After the first insect-killing frost, 10 randomly selected soil cores are
removed from each treatment per replication (block) - 5 samples are taken from
within the rows and 5 from the interrow space.  A single 1 pint composite sample
is drawn from the thoroughly mixed whole sample originating from the 10 sub samples.
The composite sample is then washed through custom-built rootworm egg extractors
and the sample is counted for number of rootworm eggs.  These eggs will hatch
during the next growing season and the counts can be used to estimate insecticide
effectiveness in reducing the infestation during the next growing season.
                                COTTON


     Insect pests are generally present in cotton throughout the cotton producing
areas of the United States in sufficient numbers to seriously effect yields of
cotton unless control measures are applied.  Insects of primary importance are
the boll weevil, Anthonomous grand-is Boheman; the bollworm, Heliothis sea (Boddie);
and the tobacco budworm, Heliothis virescens (Fabricious).  Other arthropods that
are implicated as serious cotton pests include several species of thrips, the
cotton aphid, Aphis gossypii Glover; the cotton fleahopper, Psallus seriatus
(Rueter); spider mites, Tetranychus spp.  These insects cause losses estimated
in excess of $350 million to $400 million annually to cotton.
Boll Weevil

     The boll weevil is the most important species of insect that attacks cotton
in the United States and suggested evaluation procedures for this pest are empha-
sized.  Many other insect pest species may be sampled and evaluated at the time
data are being collected for this insect species.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a good agronomic variety of cotton.
Select good uniform soil for the entire plot area.

     Locate tests in four to five geographical areas of the boll weevil infested
states.
     Plot Size and Design:—

     Ground Application-Plots must be large enough to prevent "spill-over," i.e.,
drift of applied materials to adjacent plots.  Plots must be large enough that
data collection will not interfere with normal development and maturity of the
crop.  For example, pulling squares from very small plots each week to monitor

-------
                                    -12-
boll weevil infestations would delay maturity of the crop.  Delayed maturity
could compound the results of evaluation because late maturity could make the
crop more susceptible to late season pests and weather.

     The length of the plots also are important in terms of proper application
of pesticides.  Generally, when a spray machine first enters a plot, the speed
of the machine and the boom pressure are slightly less than optimum.  Thus, the
rate of application may be higher than the intended rate.  It is equally important
also in terms of effective sampling procedures.  One example is the potential
effect of excessive square or fruit removal during sampling.  In addition, plot
size must be related to the behavior of the insect.  For example, the boll weevil
female tends to move down a row rather than across rows during her oviposition
period.  Thus, samples collected along a single row will "skew" the infestation
data.  Plots should be large enough to collect a random sample across and along
several rows to obtain an accurate sample.

     The minimum plot size should be 8 rows x 15.2 m (50 row feet); randomized
block; four replications.  Collect all data from the center 4 rows of these plots;
do not collect data from plants within ca. 1.5 m (5 feet) of the ends of the plots.
This provides 4 to 8 rows of buffer between data rows for the respective candidate
compounds.

     Aerial Application-For aerial application test plots the length of the rows
are extremely important.  Each plot should have at least 3 swath widths per plot
 (assuming swath width is at least 12.2 m (40 feet).  Collect data from the center
swath; at least three sub-samples may be taken from center swath.  This will
provide ca. 24.4 m (80 feet) of buffer data collection areas to prevent the
influence of drift.  Do not collect data within 45.7 m to 61 m (150 to 200 ft.)
of the row ends because this area is usually not treated as thoroughly as the
center of the plot.


     Application and Equipment:—Standard high clearance on tractor mounted
sprayer equipped with at least two nozzles per row mounted on the spray boom.
One nozzle should be mounted directly over row.  Calibrate ground sprayer to
deliver 7.57 to 37.85 liters/ha (2 to 10 gallons of spray per acre).  Calibrate
aerial application to deliver 7.57 to 11.35 liters/ha (2 to 3 gallons of spray
per acre).


     Sampling:—Insect populations should be monitored at least weekly; counts
should be made just prior to each insecticide application (no more than one day
prior to application).

     To monitor boll weevil populations, collect data by the square pulling
method.  To do so, collect no less than 25 green (do not collect yellow or flared
squares) squares at random from each replicate.  When squares become hard to find
 (in late August), take damaged boll counts, but this method is much less accurate
because of multiple egg puncture.

     Do not combine egg and feeding punctures.  Count only egg punctures.  Note
egg punctures.  Make notes on adult weevils as to general abundance of young
weevils in white blooms, etc.  Attempts to count adults on plants can be very
misleading—it is directly proportional to the aggressiveness and thoroughness of
the individual technician.

-------
                                    -13-
     Record weekly damage counts and compute seasonal average infestations.
All statistical analysis should be done on these seasonal averages.  Report the
weekly counts also so that the influence of unusually abundant rainfall, etc.
can be studied.  Yield data should be collected by mechanical harvester.  At
least 1/3 of the plot should be harvested for yield data.  Care should be exercised
in noting any excessive skips in the rows harvested.  Any such skips should be
measured.  Often in test plantings, the frequent activity of insect sampling as
well as inadequate planting procedures (for example, fungicides or effective
systemics for early season pests may have been left out) may result in less than
optimum stands.  If skips are the result of phytotoxicity factors associated with
the test material they would not be counted, but this is unlikely to result in
skips (more likely to be consistent throughout the plot).  Hand harvesting can be
used, but this provides for greater variation in efficiency because of different
people harvesting.  Such variation can greatly influence yield data from small
plots.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—As mentioned above, data should be collected
only from the center rows to allow a buffer between data rows of adjacent plots.
Also, no data should be taken from the ends of rows.  Analyze data by Duncan's
new multiple range test and at the 5 percent level of probability.

     The following data should be reported:
     Name of Investigator:
     Address of Investigator:
     Crop:
     Soil Type  (if applicable)
     Experimental Design:
     No. of Replicates:
     Chemical Tested:
     Formulation Tested:
     Dosages Tested:
     Method of Application:
     Time of Application(s):

     Other Pesticides Applied:
Varieties:
                   Soil Moisture:
                   Plot Size:
                   Lot No.
Per 100 Gallons:
a.  Type of Equipment:
b.  Type of Spray:
c.  Coverage:
a.  Date(s):
b.  Stage of  Crop:
Per Acre:
Bollworm and Tobacco Budworm

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control the bollworm and tobacco budworm on cotton is very similar to the
method previously described under Boll Weevil - Cotton.  Only the modifications
of that method are noted below.

-------
                                    -14-
     Application and Equipment:—Standard high clearance on tractor mounted
sprayer equipped with at least two nozzles per row mounted on the spray boom.
One nozzle should be mounted directly over row.  Calibrate ground sprayer to
deliver 7.57 to 30.28 liters/ha (2 to 8 gals,  of spray per acre).  Calibrate
aerial application to deliver 7.57 to 11.35 liters/ha (2 to 3 gallons of spray
per acre).


     Sampling:—Insect populations should be monitored at least weekly; counts
should be made just prior to each insecticide  application (no more than one day
prior to application).

     For moniotring Heliothis, collect the following data:  (1) egg count;
(2) live larvae in terminals (upper 18 inches  of main stem);  (3) Heliothis—
damaged squares; and (4) Heliothis damaged bolls.

     Heliothis egg counts in small plot research can be misleading because moths
are immobile in plots treated with the most effective material, and egg counts
may be equal to or may surpass counts in the controlled plots.  However, a record
of egg counts will allow a more accurate determination of effectiveness of an
ovicide—insecticide.  For example, there may  be 100 eggs per 100 terminals but
the next week only two larvae may be found on  those 100 terminals.  This is an
indication of the effectiveness of an insecticide with ovicide properties.  Count
eggs only in the terminal portion of the plants.  Sample 25 randomly distributed
plants per replicate  (within the center of the plot rows).

     When sampling for eggs monitor live larvae in the terminals.  These larvae
will be  invariably small (first to third instar).  These counts will indicate
the effectiveness candidate compound against small larvae.  Check a minimum of
25 terminals per replicate for these counts.  Check for squares for bollworm
feeding damage.  Again, a minimum of 25 squares per replicate are checked.  This
can be done in conjunction with boll weevil sampling.

     In mid to late season, monitor Heliothis  damaged bolls.   This can be done
by examining all bolls in 3.04 m (10 successive row feet) in each replicate.
Thus a total of 12.2 m (40 row feet) are checked for each material.  Count the
total number of bolls present and the number of damaged bolls and convert the
data to a percentage damage level or convert the data to the number of bolls and
number of damaged bolls per acre.  Either method is useful; however, the latter
method is best because boll load can be correlated with subsequent harvest yield
data.

     Whenever possible collect a representative sample of the Heliothis larvae
infesting the plant.  Bring them back to the laboratory and identify them to
species.  By doing so, the ratio of the two species can be determined on a
periodic basis.  This data is very useful in interpreting the efficacy of the
data.  However, the collector must be careful with the sampling technique.
Heliothis zea are more susceptible to organophosphate insecticides.  Heliothis
viresoens are more tolerant to organophosphate insecticides.   Thus, it is suggested
that these collections be made adjacent non treated control plots.

-------
                                    -15-
                                 Referenoes

Arant, F. S.  1951.  Cotton insects and their control with insecticides.
     Auburn U. Agria. Exp. Sin. Cira. 106.

	.  1955.  Cotton insects can cost state's growers $50 million in a single
     year.  Highlights Agric. Res., Vol. 2, No. 2.  Auburn U. Agric. Exp. Stn.

Bradley, J. R.  1975.  Personal communication.

Duncan, D. B.  1955.  Multiple range and multiple F tests.  Biometrics.  11:1-42.

Gilliland, F. S.   1975.  Personal communication.

Watson, T. F., and M. C. Sconyers.  1955.  Comparison of insecticide application
     schedules for control of cotton insects.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  48:
Lygus, Lygus spp.

     Seasonal applications can start and continue or cease based on numberical
counts of  the Lygus  spp. population.  Generally this is from late May through
late August.  The  established methods are thorough but very time consuming.  De
Vac counts  take a  lot  of hours to count and to identify the many different species
of insects  present in  the samples.


     Crop  and Location of Tests:—The variety should be a commercial variety
for the test area, e.g., Acala.

     The test site should be well selected to ensure a uniform population which
is more likely to  occur when the test site is in close proximity to such crops
as safflower and alfalfa.  The cotton should be in good growing condition,
established and maintained under good agriculture practice consistent with the
commercial  growing requirements of the crop.  Soil type shoud be suitable for the
growth of  the crop and as uniform as is possible throughout the test site.
     Plot Size and Design:—Use a randomized complete block design.

     Use at least 4 replicates per treatment.  More replicates are needed where
the population is light.  Lygus adults are quite mobile, thus plots must be large
enough to reduce migration between the treatments and also from outside areas.
     Ground application plots should be 24-32 rows wide.
should be 6-10 swaths (2 x 12 meters)  (6 x 40 feet).
Air application plots
     Application and Equipment:—Applications should be made on a scheduled basis,
but only as indicated by population sampling.  No buffer rows are used but sampling
is to be made from only the center rows of each treatment replication.  Always
include an untreated control, if possible, when crop loss is not a factor.  Other-
wise, it should be compared to the accepted standard.

-------
                                     -16-
     The application equipment on large plots should be of a commercial type and
the liters per hectare dictated by the size of cotton which can range from 57-227
liters (15-60 gal.)  per hectare with nozzle placement such as to provide complete
coverage.  Usually the pressure will range between 2-3 kgm/cm2 (25-35 psi).


     Sampling:—Evaluate population density by making 50 sweeps per one row in
the center of each treatment.   Sample on both ends and in the middle of the single
row on experimental plots.   Sweeps should be made twice weekly plus a sweep sample
before and after each chemical treatment.  Treat only when twice weekly net sampling
indicates that treatment is due.

     Treatments should be made in the "early square" stage when 6-8 Lygus adults
and/or nymphs appear per 50 sweeps.

     Treatments should be made in the "early bloom" stage when 10 Lygus adults
and/or nymphs appear per 50 sweeps.

     Treatments should be made in the "peak bloom" stage when 15-20 Lygus adults
and/or nymphs appear per 50 sweeps.

     All new  insecticides should be thoroughly checked and evaluated for any
positive or negative effects on yield and quality.  In the advanced stage of
evaluation the cotton should be collected, weighed and graded in accordance with
the acceptable commercial methods.

     Any type of and the degree of, phytotoxicity should be reported provided it
can positively be attributed to the test foliar insecticides.  Such responses as
stunting, leaf burn and chlorosis are usually the factors to evaluate.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—The data should be analyzed using analysis
of variance at the 5% level and check mortality, if any, accounted for by using
Abbott's formula.

     The following information should be included in reporting test results:

     Product name and formulation used, indicating active ingredient.
     Crop (variety)  treated.
     Location of the test.
     Type irrigation used (furrow or sprinkler).
     Plot size.
     Number of replications.
     Rate of applications - a.i. per hectare.
     Finished spray volume per hectare.
     Method of application.
     Stage of crop growth.
     Treatment dates.
     Harvest dates.
     How samples were taken.
     Number of samples taken.
     Percent infestation.
     Phytotoxicity.

-------
                                    -17-
     Comments regarding unusual test conditions or performance.
     Temperature and general weather conditions at time of treatment.
     Rainfall or any unusual weather after the treatment.
     Include comment on performance as related to commercial acceptability.
     Statistical analysis.
                                  Reference

Sagaser, J. N.  July 19, 1975.  Personal written communications.  Velsicol
     Chemical Corporation, Commercial Development, 6197 Millbrook Avenue,
     Fresno, California.  209/431-1678.
Mites, Tetranijc'hus spp.

     There are several different species of the Tetranyahus genus that are a
major problem in cotton.  The conditions under which they exist or become a
problem varies somewhat from region to region, but usually it is associated with
weak cotton and under hot, humid, dry climatic conditions.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—The cotton variety should be one that is
grown in the test area for commercial purposes.  Preferrably choose a variety,
if there is more than one grown in the area, that is known to be highly susceptible
to mites.

     Soil suitable for cotton should be selected and preferrably an area where
cotton has been grown previously.  The soil type should be uniform and prepared
consistent with good agriculture practice for the crop and area.  There are
specific activities that can be carried out in each region to encourage good
mite populations and consultation should be pursued with the local Experiment
Station and Extension authorities.
     Plot Size and Design:—Use a randomized complete block design so that the
results can be analyzed, statistically.

     Use at least 4 replications per treatment and for ground application, each
plot should be at least 16-24 beds wide (large replicates).

     Use large replicates for air application, but replicates width's can be 3-4
swaths wide (36-48 meters) (120-160 feet).

     With the replicates as large as have been suggested, buffer rows should not
be necessary.


     Sampling:—The fact that, under ideal conditions, mites reproduce rapidly
and populations can reach epidemic levels in a short period of time requires
that observations be made every 2-4 days.

-------
                                    -18-
     For ground applications collect 25-50 leaves at random through the center
of each plot and from various levels on the plant, i.e. bottom, middle, top.
The leaves should then be brushed using a McBurnie mite brushing machine.  Mites
should then be counted, including all stages;  egg, larvae and adult.  In the case
of larvae and adults, living and dead should also be recorded.  The data can be
presented as average living or dead and number of eggs per leaf.

     Economically important levels can occur very rapidly under ideal conditions.
Four-five (4-5) mites per leaf is approaching a critical infestation while 10-12
mites per leaf is critical and requires application.

     Sample once weekly starting in June or July, and sample before and after
each application.  One or two (1-2) mites per leaf after application represents
good control.

     Yields are very ambiguous unless they can be directly related to the test
foliar miticide.  Yield data is very valuable, but it must be known that it is
a direct result of the miticide or it is worthless information.

     Any type of and the degree of, phytotoxicity should be reported, provided
it can positively be attributed to the test foliar miticides.  Such responses as
stunting, leaf burn and chlorosis are usually the factors reported.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See Lygus - Cotton.


                                  Eeference

Sagaser, J. N.  July 19, 1975.  Personal written communications.  Velsicol
     Chemical Corporation, Commercial Development, 6197 Millbrook, Avenue,
     Fresno, California.  209/431-1678.
Pink Bollworm, Pect-inophoTa qossyp-iella

     The testing and plot design of tests for Pectinophora gossypiella control
are developed around the nature of the insect pest.  The adult pink bollworm moth
deposits the eggs under the calyx of the maturing cotton boll.  The egg and hatch-
ing larva are protected here from chemical sprays.  Except for a very short period
of a few minutes to a couple of hours - between the hatching of the pink bollworm
egg under the boll calyx and until the larva bores into the inside of the boll -
the larva is not out in the open and susceptible to chemical applications.  Chemical
applications and research testing for larval control during this short "exposed
period" of the pink bollworm are mostly unsuccessful or only partly successful.
The best method for pink bollworm control is to control the adult moth.  Thus,
research programs are most successfully completed by monitoring and treating for
adult moths.

     The population density of the pink bollworm adult is most easily and accurately
monitored by using pheromone traps, using daily moth counts to determine:  a) if
the pink bollworm is present in the test area; b) if the population density is in-
creasing or decreasing; and c) the effects of various chemical or biological treat-
ments on the adult moth.

-------
                                    -19-
     Tests for pink bollworm control should begin sometime in July, in California
and Arizona, in order to synchronize with the period called "peak boll set".
This period is generally the time when the greatest number of vulnerable bolls are
present, greatest crop injury can occur, and when the greatest population of adult
moths is present.  Test treatments showing greatest effectiveness during this
period also automatically have demonstrated that the treatment will be effective
on lesser population densities.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—A cotton variety should be selected that is
common to the test area and that is known to be susceptible to the pink bollworm.
The variety should be recorded in the test data forms.

     Site selection and the time to make the first application are difficult to
determine.  Pink bollworm pheromone traps are excellent and accurate, but are
often not readily available or it is expensive to acquire the traps and pheromone.
Boll cutting will give larval counts and establish that pink bollworm is present,
yet does not indicate if the adult moths are present during the test.  Larval
counts prove only that adults were present earlier to deposit the eggs.
     Plot Size and Design:—Use 4 replications per treatment and a randomized
complete block design.

     For ground applications, plots should be one-tenth of a hectare or larger.
Ground applications should have plots separated by a minimum of 2 buffer rows.

     Aerial application plots should be a minimum of 3-5 swaths wide (36-60 m)
(120-200 ft.).  Be certain that all sampling of traps and bolls is from the center
of each plot.


     Application and Equipment:—Two methods may be used for evaluating treatment
effectiveness on pink bollworm adults:  a) "one or two application" testing; or
b) "seasonal application" testing.

     "One or two application" testing is sometimes the less accurate of the two
methods.  The primary reason is that the test is often completed missing the peak
adult moth density, and/or the control treatments are not held under pressure over
a long enough period to be certain that control would be maintained.

     This test is often necessary a) when testing time is limited; b) in early
screening trials; and/or c) when sufficient chemical materials are not available
for seasonal use.

     The best way to make the test results most accurate with the "one or two
application" method, is to use pheromone traps prior to the peak boll period.  The
first adult moth to appear is a fairly accurate estimation of when to apply the
first treatment.  If two applications are desired, the second application is applied
one week following the first application.

-------
                                    -20-
     The pheromone trap counts early in the season - just before application,
and following application - will measure the effectiveness of each treatment.
Weekly boll cutting of 100 bolls before, during and after application will indicate
each treatment's effectiveness also.

     "Seasonal application" testing for pink bollworm is aimed at controlling
the adult pink bollworm.

     Pheromone traps should be placed in the field in adequate numbers and
locations to thoroughly monitor the adult moths.   Place the traps and make daily
counts early in the season, before pink bollworms normally appear in the field
(prior to peak boll set).  Peak boll set is a 5-7 week period, usually starting
in July, when most boll damage and infestation occurs and when the most vulnerable
bolls are present.  Application generally starts  just prior and during peak boll
set.  This usually coincides with the population  count increases in the pheromone
traps and infestations in the bolls.

     Boll counts should be made after adult moths appear before and after each
treatment is applied.  Boll counts are to be used to monitor populations and the
presence of infestations, not to determine when to apply the treatments.

     Treatment applications - Apply the treatments weekly for 5-7 weeks, based on
population pressure of pink bollworm adults as determined by the trap counts.
Make daily pheromone trap counts of adults and weekly boll counts throughout the
entire testing season or period.


     Sampling:—There are two methods of evaluation of pink bollworm populations:

     1) Pheromone traps and daily adult moth counts from the traps.  Pheromone
traps are best for monitoring the adult moth population to determine:  a) when
the adult moths' presence starts and ends; b) when peak treatment is needed; and
c) the effect of the test treatments on the adult population.

     2) Cutting of 100 bolls weekly.  Weekly boll cutting of 100 bolls collected
at random from each treatment indicates if indeed pink bollworm is present in the
test area.

     Although delayed, boll cutting tends to give an indication of treatment
effectiveness.  Boll cutting for larval counts is not a good indicator of when
to start treatments.  Larval presence does not mean continued adult moth presence.
As stated earlier, because the larvae are inside  of the bolls, larval treatment is
futile.  Adult moth kill is the only effective population control of pink bollworm.

     Cotton boll selection - At random, collect 100 of only the firm shiny green
bolls, approximately equal to a quarter or a fifty cent piece in size.  These
bolls are generally between 12 and 24 days old.  Older or younger bolls are not
used for counts becuase younger bolls are not mature enough for the larvae, and
older, tougher hulled bolls cannot be penetrated  by the young larvae just hatched
from the egg.   Cut each boll and inspect each section of the boll for larvae damage

     Always sample bolls at random and from the center of each plot away from
the plot margins.

-------
                                    -21-
     Always include a standard and an untreated check for comparison with the
other treatments.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See Lygus - Cotton.


                                 References

Dromgoole, Aubrey.  1975  Personal communication.  Velsicol Chemical Corporation,
     Rocky, Oklahoma.

Leigh, Tom E.  1975.  Personal communication.  University of California USDA
     Station, Shafter, California.

Sagaser, J. N.  July 19, 1975.  Personal written communications.  Methodology for
     Experimental Testing of Western Cotton Pests.  Velsicol Chemical Corporation,
     Fresno, California.

Shlomo, N., N. Green, and I. Teick.  1973.  Trapping pink bollworm moths with
     Hexalure:  Masking effect of geometrical and positional isomers.  J.  Boon.
     Entomol.  66(6):1349.

Shorey, H. H.  1975.  New advances in pink bollworm control.  Summ. Pros.  Beltwide
     Cotton Prod. - Mech. Conf.  January 8-9, 1975, New Orleans, Louisiana.
     National Cotton Council of America, Box 12285, Memphis, Tennessee.

Tuscano, Nicholas.  1975.  Personal communication.  University of California
     Agricultural Extension Service, Department of Entomology, Riverside,  California.

Watson, Theo.  1975.  Personal communication.  University of Arizona, Tucson,
     Arizona.

Young, David F., Jr.  1969.  Cotton Insect Control, 1st ed.  Onmoor Press,
     Birmingham, Alabama.
                    SORGHUM, Sorghum bicolor L. (Moench)

     The following suggested methodology for evaluating pesticides for the control
of foliar invertebrate pests of sorghum is identical in general parameters to the
testing of insecticides for efficacy on corn as described previously in this volume.
The differences occur in the sampling procedures following the specific pest.  See
Field Crops - Corn for general parameters.
Greenbug, Schizaphis graminwn (Rondani)

     The insect feeds on the leaves and stem.  While feeding it injects toxic
saliva which destroys plant tissues.  Early symptoms are red patches on some lower
leaves and partly or completely necrotic leaves.  Moderate greenbug attack causes
stunting and delayed maturity as well as lowered yields.  Severly infested plants
may be killed by greenbug feeding.

-------
                                    -22-
     The stage of the crop at application depends upon insect infestation, from
emergence to pre-boot and later.

     The stage of insect at application is all life stages whenever population
densities of beneficial insects are insufficient to prevent greenbug outbreaks.

     The interval between application varies from 1-3 applications, 3-7 days
apart.


     Sampling:—Pretreatment greenbug counts from at least 10 randomly selected
sorghum plants from each treatment per replication (block) should be made.

     Two or more post-treatment greenbug counts from at least 10 randomly
selected sorghum plants from each treatment per replication (block) should be
made.  Sampling intervals vary from 4 to 15 days.  A common sampling scheme is to
make counts at 3, 7, 14, and 21 days after application.

     As an alternative to whole plant counts, greenbugs may be counted on 1 leaf
from each of 10 randomly selected sorghum leaves per replication (block).  The
same numbered leaf  (counting from soil level) should be examined on a given
sampling date.

     The number and location leaves killed by greenbugs may be recorded in each
plot 1-2 weeks following peak greenbug infestation.

     Yields may be obtained by manually harvesting at least 0.0004 ha (0.001 acre)
from each treatment in each replication (block).  Manually harvested sorghum heads
may be threshed, and the seeds cleaned, weighed, and converted to kg/ha (Ibs/acre)
at 12.5% moisture.  Mechanical harvesters also may be employed.

     The effect of the test insecticides on non-target insects, i.e. beneficial
insects, should be recorded for each insecticide.


                                 References

Gate, J. R., Jr., D. G. Bottrell, and G. L. Teetes.  1973.  Management of the
     greenbug on grain sorghum.  1.  Testing foliar treatments of insecticides
     against greenbugs and corn leaf aphids.  J. Econ. Entomol.  66:945-951.

Daniels, N. E.  1972.  Insecticidal control of greenbugs in grain sorghum.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  65:235-240.

Harvey, T. L., and H. L. Hackerott.  1970.  Chemical control of a greenbug on
     sorghum and infestation effects on yields.  J. Econ. Entomol.  63:1536-1539.

Teetes, G. L., and J. W. Johnson.  1973.  Damage assessment of the greenbug on
     grain sorghum.  J. Econ. Entomol.  66:1181-1186.

Ward, C. R., E. W. Huddleston, D. Ashdown, J. C. Owens, and K. L. Polk.   1970.
     Greenbug control on grain sorghum and the effects of tested insecticides on
     other insects.  J. Econ. Entomol.  63:1929-1934.

-------
                                     -23-
Sorghum Midge, ContaT-Lnia sorghicola  (Coquillett)

     The sorghum midge larvae feed on developing ovaries and grain fails to
mature.  Affected spikelets remain tightly closed and, in severe infestations,
whole heads fail to set grain.  On dissection, larvae and pupae may be seen in
the spikelets.

     The stage of crop at application is when 20% of sorghum heads begin to bloom.

     The stage of insect at application is the adult.

     The interval between applications is 3-7 days.  Usually only 1-2 applications
are made.
     Sampling:—Adult midges present at midmorning 2-3 days after application can
be counted on at least 10 sorghum heads for each treatment per replication (block)
as a measure of immigration.

     The number of midges emerging from 10-40 sorghum heads for each treatment
per replication (block) is determined by excising heads and holding the heads in
emergence cages.

     Mature sorghum heads are collected and the levels of midge infestations are
determined by examination based on midge damage to individual florets.  At least
10 mature sorghum heads should be harvested from each treatment per replication
(block).

     Yields are likely to be the best method of evaluating insecticide efficacy
against the sorghum midge.  Yields may be obtained by machine or manual harvest
of a least 0.0004 ha  (0.001 acre) sub plots from each replication (block).  Manually
harvested sorghum heads may be threshed, and the seeds cleaned, weighed, and con-
verted  to kg/ha (Ibs/acre) at 12.5% moisture.


                                 Beferenoes

Huddleston, E. W., D. Ashdown, B. Maunder, C. R. Ward, G. Wilde, and C. E. Forehand.
     1972.  Biology and control of the sorghum midge.  1.  Chemical and cultural
     control studies in West Texas.  J. Econ. Entomol.  65:851-855.

Randolph, N. M., M. V. Meisch, and G. L. Teetes.  1971.  Effectiveness of certain
     insecticides against the sorghum midge based on a new method of determining
     infestation.   J. Econ.  Entomol.   64:87-88.

Stanford, R. L., E. W. Huddleston, and C. R. Ward.  1972.  Biology and control
     of the sorghum midge.  3.  Importance of stage of bloom and effective residual
     of selected insecticides.  J. Econ. Entomol.   65:796-799.

Ward, C. R., E.  W. Huddleston, R. A.  Parodi, and G. Ruiz.  1972.  Biology and
     control of the sorghum midge.  2.  Chemical control in Argentina.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.   65:817-818.

-------
                                    -24-
Banks Grass Mite, Oliqonifchus pratensis (Banks)

     Mite damage to the sorghum plant is expressed as discoloration, drying,
and/or premature death of the leaves.  An additional problem is the death and
subsequent lodging of mite-infested plants.   Additionally, the mites may so
weaken the plant that disease organisms partially overcome the natural resistance
of many plants.  The symptomatology is:  (1)  small, white stipuled spots occur
on the leaf along the midribs; (2) the spots  increase in size, especially on the
basal 1/2 of the leaf, followed by red or brown discoloration of the spots; (3)
leaves fold downward along the midrib, especially on the basal 1/2 of the leaf, and
death of all or a portion of the leaf follows;  (4) symptoms proceed from leaf to
leaf up the plant, and some leaves may be unaffected.  Damage to heads consists of
shriveled seeds and extensive webbing.

     The stage of the crop at application is  the late-mild to early-soft-dough
stage and later stages of plant growth.

     The stage of mite at application is all  life stages.

     Usually only 1 application is made.  Under situations of severe stress a
second application ca. 10 days following the  first application may be warranted.


     Sampling:—Pre- and post-treatment counts  are made by visual selection of 10
of the most heavily infested leaves from each treatment per replication (block).
A single microscopic field of 0.5 -in. diam.  is selected in the most densely in-
fested area on the leaf.  All life stages (eggs, larvae, early and late-stage
nymphs, and adults) of mites in each microscopic field are counted.

     An alternative to counting mites while the mites are on the leaves is to
select the 10 most heavily infested leaves from each treatment as described above.
Then, a strip of cellophane tape is placed across the most-dense colony on the
underside of the selected leaf.  The tape is  then placed on a 1" X 2" glass
microscope slide.  The slide is then inverted and the number of mites per unit
area is determined by viewing a 0.5-inch diam.  circle through a calibrated micro-
scope field.  (Personal communication, Dr. Jay  D. Stone, Kansas State University).

     Observations are made on plant lodging by  counting lodged plants on at least
0.0004 ha (0.001 acre) from each treatment in each replication (block).


                                  Reference

Ward, C.  R., E.  W. Huddleston, J. C. Owens, T.  M. Hills, L. G. Richardson, and
     D. Ashdown.   1972.  Control of the Banks grass mite attacking grain sorghum
     and corn in West Texas.  J.  Eoon. Entomol.  65:523-529.

-------
                                    -25-
                                  SOYBEANS


     Insect pests are sometimes present in soybeans throughout the soybean
producing areas of the United States in sufficient numbers to seriously affect
yields of soybeans unless control measures are applied.  Soybeans are attacked
by insects that feed on the seedlings, foliage and pods.  Insects that attack the
seedlings and stems include various species of cutworms, the three-cornered-alfalfa
hopper and the lesser cornstalk borer.  The principal forage feeding insects in-
clude the velvetbean caterpillar, Antioavsia gemmatillis; soybean looper,
Pseudoplusia includens; cabbage looper, Tr-ichoplusia ni; beet armyworm, Spodoptera
exigua; the fall armyworm, Spotoptera frugiperda; the green cloverworm, Plathypena
soabra; the bean leaf beetle, Certoma trifureata; and the Mexican bean beetle,
Epilachna varivestis.

     Pod feeding insects include the "podworm," Eeliothis zea; and stinkbugs,
Nezara ver"Ldula; and Aeroscternum hilare.  The podworm and stinkbugs are perhaps
the most important insects that attack soybeans.  The podworm is the "key" insect
pest to soybeans in the south and southeast.  This insect attacks beans from pod-
set to pod-maturity.  Infestations are usually heavier following treatment for
foliage feeding insects prior to bloom.  The podworm usually occurs in damaging
levels from mid August to mid September.  The small worm usually starts feeding
on the leaves and blooms then bores through the pods and destroys several beans.
Both the nymphs and adults of stinkbugs suck juices from young soybean pods
causing discoloration to the beans and subsequent reduction in grade.
Podworm, Stinkbugs and Defoliating Insects


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a good agronomic variety; select good
uniform soil for the entire plot area.

     Locate tests in 4 to 5 geographical areas of soybean production.


     Plot Size and Design:—

     Ground Application - Plots must be large enough to prevent spill-over, i.e.,
drifts of applied candidate compounds to adjacent plots.  Plots should be 4 to 8
rows wide and at least 40 to 50 ft. long (border rows are desirable if the test
area is large enough).  The plot should be randomized and replicated at least
four times.  The rates of materials, i.e., active a.i. per acre, would be variable
with the objective of the test.  The finished spray and volume per acre is variable
but generally within the range of 18.9 to 75.6 liters/ha (5 to 20 gals, of spray
mix per acre).

     Aerial Application - For aerial application test plots the length of the
rows are important.  Each plot should have at least three swath widths per plot
assuming plot width is at least 12.2 m (40 feet).  Collect data from the center
swath; this will provide approximately 24.4 m (80 ft.) of buffer data collection
areas to prevent the influence of drift.  Do not collect data within 45.7 m (150 ft.)
of the row ends because its area is not usually treated as well as the center plot.

-------
                                    -26-
     Application and Equipment:—Standard high clearance on tractor mounted
spray equipped with at least two nozzles per row mounted on a spray boom.  One
nozzle should be mounted over the row.  A knap sack sprayer may also be used
preferably with compressed C02 and pressure regulator (2.1-4.2 kg/cm^ (30-60 psi)).
The interval between treatment and observation should be from 24 to 48 hours.
The interval between observation should be 5-7 days for the duration of the grow-
ing season.  This is necessary to gain information on impact to non-target species
and resurgence of pest species.

     The timing of the application for certain insects is extremely important.
For corn earworm (podworm), it is generally necessary to apply before plants
develop a closed canopy.  For the southern green stinkbug, economic infestations
usually do not develop before pod-filling stage (4 to 8 weeks after first bloom).
Crop growth stage should always be noted in materials and methods.


     Sampling:—Apply materials as foliar sprays at rates postulated to give at
least 80 percent control compared to untreated checks 48 hours posttreatment.
Make insecticide counts on the two middle rows by shaking or beating the foliage
over a ground cloth and recording live insects from the cloth.  Sample at least
six of these points within the center two rows of each plot.  Three feet of row
at each point is adequate.  Record data on the number of live insects per 5.48 m
(18-ft. of row).  Calibrate percent control as follows:  Percent control equals
100 x divided by the ck, whereas  x equals the average number of live larvae 48
hours after insecticidal treatment and ck equals the average no. of live insects
after 48 hours in untreated check.  Eighty percent control is generally considered
the minimum level of control.  It is usually extremely difficult to get an accurate
count of dead individuals on most species; consequently, counts of live insects
remaining after 48 hours is important.  The degree of plant injury and economic
threshold levels in most bean producing areas is one per foot of row for corn ear-
worms and stinkbugs.  For all other defoliate feeders it is 33 percent leaf loss
prior to bloom and pod-set and not to exceed 20 percent after pod-set until pod-
maturity.

     Yields should be taken especially if tests involve timing of applications
according to economic thresholds.  Harvest before beans become dry enough to
shatter.  Fifteen to 18 percent moisture is a good time to harvest.


                                 References

Begum, A., and W. G. Eden.  1965.  Influence of defoliation on yield and quality
     of soybeans.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  58:591-2.

Chant, D. A.  1966.  Research need for integrated control.  Proc. FAO Symp.
     Integrated Pest Contr. p. 103-9.  Rome, 1965.

Duncan, D. B.  1955.  Multiple range and multiple F tests.  Biometrics 11:1-42.

Hill, C. C.  1918.  Control of the green cloverworm in alfalfa fields.  USD A
     Farmers Bull.  932. 7 p.

Ledbetter, R. J., and Max H. Bass.  1975.  Soybean insect control.  Auburn U.
     Circ.  E-3.

-------
                                     -27-
Pedigo, L. P., J. D. Stone, and R. B. Clemen.   1970.  Photometric device  for
     measuring foliage loss caused by insects.  Ann. Entomol. Soo. Amer.   63:815-8.

Sherman, F.  1920.  The green  cloverworm  (Plathypena soabra Fabr.) as a pest of
     soybeans.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  13:295-303.

Smith, R. H., and M. H. Bass.  1972a.  Soybean  response to various levels  of
     podworm damage.  J. Eoon. Entomol.   65:193-5.

        1972b.  Relationship of artificial pod  removal to soybean yields.
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  65:606-8.

Todd, J. W., and L. W. Morgan.  1972.  Effects of hand defoliation on yield and
     seed weight of soybeans.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  65:567-70.

Turnipseed,  S. G.  1972a.  Response of soybeans to foliage losses in South Carolina.
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  65:224-9.

        1972b.  Management of  insect pests of soybeans.  Proo. Tall Timbers Conf.
     Eool. Animal Cont. Habitat Manage.  4:189-203.
Mexican Bean Beetle, Epilaohna varivestis, and Bean Leaf Beetle, Cerotoma trifuroata

     The following procedure  is adequate  for field evaluation of foliar insecti-
cides for the Mexican bean beetle, Epilaohna varivestis (larvae and adults), and
the bean leaf beetle, Cerotoma trifuroata  (adults).


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Choose  a variety that is common to this crop on
a commercial basis and for the area in which the field test evaluation is conducted.

     The selected test site should be typical for the crop and selected so that
drift of insecticide from neighboring crops is not a hazard or that interference
from any other practice with  adjacent areas will not interfere with the results in
the test plot.  The soil should be uniform and prepared in a manner acceptable to
the normal method for that crop.  Fertilizer and irrigation, if used and/or
necessary, should be used in  accordance with good agricultural practice for the
crop.  The test site should,  if possible, be selected in an area where there has
been a history of Mexican bean beetle and bean leaf beetle infestations.


     Plot Size and Design:—Small plots for preliminary evaluations can be two
rows in width and 15 m (50 ft.) in length.  Each plot may be considered a single
replicate and four replicates for each insecticide treatment are considered
desirable.  It is also suggested that an untreated buffer row be established between
each plot to minimize the effects of drift.  1.5-1.8 m (5-6 ft.) alleyways are
also recommended to separate  the blocks.  Such a plot setup should be on a ran-
domized complete block design so that the data may be analyzed statistically for
significance.

-------
                                     -28-
     Large plots should be set up on the same basis with a randomized complete
block design.  The treatment replicates can be 4-6 rows wide and 30 m (100 ft.)
or more long.  In the larger plots it is not necessary to leave buffer zones or
to separate blocks.

     Air-applied plots should be a minimum of 36 m (50 ft.) wide (3, 12 m swaths)
to prevent drift and to have enough area in the middle of the plots to select a
random representative plant grouping to make the counts.  The length of the plots
should be such that the pilot can fly level and safely for at least 180 meters
(600 ft.).


     Application and Equipment:—Small plot applications can be applied with CC^
spray equipment.  Such equipment is, by design, compact, light and portable.
This equipment is very adaptable and accurate; and since it is light, operator
fatigue can be kept at a minimum.  Nozzle selection should be made on the basis
of complete coverage, and usually a fan-type nozzle is adequate when using 95-151
1  (25-40 gals.), usually 132 1 of spray solution per hectare at 3-3.5 kgm/cm2
(25-30 psi).  All evaluations, of course, should be done prior to applying the
test materials.  Sprayer should be well cleaned before each test and between the
applications of different rates for each treatment.  It is advisable to progress
from low to high rate to minimize problems of contamination from one treatment to
the next.

     Large plot applications should follow the same basic outline; however, with
much larger plots and with commercial-type spray equipment and all plots should
be set up using a randomized complete block design.

     The same plot setup should be used with air application, using 19-38 1 (5-10
gals.) of total spray per hectare.  Replication is important, but randomizing
the plots is difficult with air application.

     The number of applications will depend on the density of the insect population;
usually a 7-10 day schedule is more than adequate, but should be dictated by the
presence of pests in the test area and that relationship to the untreated controls.


     Sampling:—The population level of the insects can be determined by taking
five sweeps per plot with a 38 cm (15 in.) net or by spreading a 1m (3 ft.) long
drop cloth between the rows and dislodging the insects from the plants on both
sides of the cloth by tapping the plants with a stick.  The insect counts can then
be recorded as the X number of insects, according to species per sweep or per 1.8 m
(6 ft.) of row 1 m (3 ft.) on each side of drop cloth.

     An estimation of insect feeding damage is also made for each plot on a scale
of 0-100%.  Each insect's feeding damage is unique and thus easily recognizable.
CeTotoma trifurcata eat rounded holes in the foliage while E. vavivestis skeletonize
the leaves.  It should be mentioned, however, that this technique of evaluation
is limited to one application and not multiple sprays, since the feeding damage
evaluation at the time of the first spray could not be distinguished from the feed-
ing damage of the second and subsequent sprays.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.

-------
                                    -29-
                                  Eefer-enoe

Tysowsky, Mike, D. H. Brooks, and R. A. Herrett.  July 17, 1975.  Field test
     procedures.  Personal communications.  ICI United States, Inc., P.O. Box 208,
     Goldsboro, North Carolina.  919/736-3030.
Southern Green Stinkbug, Eezar>a viridula (L.)

     The southern green stinkbug, Nezara viridula, readily feeds on developing
soybean seed in many areas of the southeastern United States.  The nature and
extent of the damage depends upon the state of seed development at which feeding
occurs.  Prices paid for soybeans are discounted for stink but damage based on %
of the actual percentage of stinkbug damaged seed.  Germinated emergence and
seedling survival are reduced significantly by all degrees of southern green stink-
bug damage.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Test plants should be a variety common to
commercial soybean production, such as "Bragg", and planted in accordance with
the normal planting season for soybeans in the test area.  The variety should be
known to be reasonably susceptible to green stinkbug infestations.  Other common
varieties grown in the test area are acceptable.

     The test site should be so selected to be void of any possible drift hazards
from other fields where insecticides may be applied.  The crop should be planted
and maintained in accordance with good agriculture practice for that crop and for
the region in which the test site is located.  The lime and fertilizer should be
applied in accordance with soil test recommendations.

     Since stinkbug populations will be affected by existing climatic conditions,
care must be taken to see that good records of climatic conditions are maintained
and reported or referenced in all reports.


     Application and Equipment:—Use a randomized complete block design.  Use at
least 6-8 replicates.  In order to maintain a known population, artificial infesta-
tion into cages over soybean plants is recommended.

     Small plots can be applied with back pack sprayers with a spray wand prepared
so that the entire plant is sprayed, usually one nozzle over the top and one from
each side.  Use 57-95 1 (15-25 gals.) per hectare at 2-2.1 kgm/cm2  (24-30 psi).

     For large plots use commercial spray equipment preferrably with drop nozzles
to ensure complete coverage. Use 57-95 1 (15-25 gals.) of spray mixture per hectare
at 2-2.1 kgm/cm2 (25-30 psi).  Use .2 to .4 hectare  (%-l acre) plots.

     For air application use at least 3 swath widths (1x12x36 m)  (3x40x120 ft.)
per plot at 19-38 1 (5-10 gals.) per hectare.  Plots should be at least  .4 hectare
(1 acre) in size so as physical drift will not occur from adjacent  plots.

-------
                                    -30-
     Sampling:—The value of the foliar sprays may be determined by placing
cages 1.8 x 1.8 x 3.6 m (6 x 6 x 12 ft.) with 1.8 cm (3/4 in.) galvanized iron
pipe frames over 2 rows,  3.6 m (12 ft.) long after the sprays have been applied
and dried on the plants.   The stinkbugs are then artificially infested by placing
fourth instar in the cages using 15 bugs per row meter.  It is not necessary to
sex the insects.  Counts  should be made by counting the number of live insects on 3,
7 and 14 days.   Before the cages are set over the rows, all insects should be
removed from the area to  be caged.

     Data should be presented as percent mortality based on number living and
dead.  The fourth instar  stinkbugs should be collected from an untreated field.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.


                                 Eeferenoes

Blickenstaff, C. C., and J. L. Huggass.  1962.  Soybean insects and related
     arthropods in Missouri.  Missouri Agvio. Exp. Stn. Bull. 803, p. 51.

Duncan, R. H.,  and J. R.  Walker.  1968.  Some effects of the southern green
     stinkbug on soybeans.  Louisiana Agrio.  12:10-11.

Johnson, B.  J., and M. D. Jillium.  1969.  Effect of pesticides on chemical
     composition of soybean seed.  Agronomy  61:379-380.

Miner, F. D.  1966.  Biology and control of stinkbugs on soybeans.  Arkansas
     Agric.  Exp. Stn. Bull. 708, p. 40.

Todd, J. W. , and S. G. Turnipseed.  1974.  Effects of southern stinkbug damage
     on yield and quality of soybeans.  J. Boon. Entomol.  67(3):421-26.
                                 SUGAR BEETS
 Beet Armyworm, Spodoptera exigua, and Fall Armyworm, Spodoptera frugiperda

     This procedure is adaptable to both small and medium-sized plots  for
 insecticide  evaluation of the beet arymworm, Spodoptera exigua, and the  fall
 armyworm, Spodoptera frugiperda, on sugar beets.


     Crop and Location of Tests;—Choose a variety that is common  to  this crop
 on a commercial basis and for the area in which the field test evaluation is
 conducted.

     The selected  test site should be typical for the crop and selected  so  that
 drift  of insecticide from neighboring crops is not a hazard or that interference
 from any other practice with adjacent areas will not interfere with the  results
 in the test  plot.  The soil should be uniform and prepared in a manner acceptable

-------
                                     -31-
to the normal method for that crop.  Fertilizer and irrigation, if used and/or
necessary, should be used in accordance with good agricultural practice for the
crop.  The test site should, if possible, be selected in an area where there
has been a hisotry of beet armyworm infestation.


     Plot Size and Design:—Small plots for preliminary evaluations can be two
rows in width and 15 m (50 ft.) in length.  Each plot may be considered a single
replicate and four replicates for each insecticide treatment are considered
desirable.  It is also suggested that an untreated buffer row be established be-
tween each plot to minimize the effects of drift.  1.5-1.8 m (5-6 ft.) alleyways
are also recommended to separate the blocks.  Such a plot setup should be on a
randomized complete block design so that the data may be analyzed statistically.

     Large plots should be set up on the same basis with a randomized complete
block design.  The treatment replicates can be 4-6 rows wide and 30 m (100 ft.)
or more long.  In the larger plots it is not necessary to leave buffer zones or
to separate blocks.

     Air-applied plots should be a minimum of 36 m (100 ft.) wide (3, 12 m swaths)
(40 ft.) to prevent drift and to have enough area in the middle of the plots to
select a random representative plant grouping to make the counts.  The length of
the plots should be such that the pilot can fly level and safely for at least 180 m
(600 ft.).


     Application and Equipment:—Small plot applications may be applied with C02
spray equipment.  Such equipment is, by design, compact, light and portable.  This
equipment is very adaptable and accurate, and since it is light, operator fatigue
can be kept at a minimum.  Nozzle selection should be made on the basis of complete
coverage, and usually a fan-type nozzle is adequate when using 95-151 1 (25-30 gals.),
usually 132 1 (30 gals.), of spray solution per hectare at 3-3.5 kgm/cm2 (25-30 psi).
All calculations should be done prior to applying the test materials.  Sprayer
should be well cleaned before each test and between the applications of different
rates for each treatment.  It is advisable to progress from low to high rate to
minimize problems of contamination from one treatment to the next.

     Large plot applications should follow the same basic outline; however, with
the large plots and with commercial-type spray equipment and, all plots should be
set up using a randomized complete block design.

     The same plot setup should be used with air application, using 19-38 1 (5-10
gals.) of total spray per hectare.  Replication is important, but randomizing the
plots is difficult with air application and is generally not considered necessary.

     The number of applications will depend on the density of the insect population;
usually a 7-10 day schedule is more than adequate, but should be dictated by the
presence of pests in the test area and that relationship to the untreated controls.


     Sampling:—Pre-treatment insect counts are necessary and it is suggested
that the counts be made on a random basis by choosing 5-10 plants per row, closely
examining for insect damage and recording the number of larvae present.  Counts
should be made on plants within the first or last 1.5 m (5 ft.) of each row.

-------
                                    -32-
     Post-treatment insect counts on days 1, 7 and 14 after spray application
should be made in the same manner as for the pre-treatment counts.  Additional
sprays can be applied to the plots if the insect pressure within them builds to
high levels.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.


                                 References

Harris, C. R. , H. J. Svec, S. A. Turnbull, and W. W. Sans.  1975.  Laboratory
     and field studies on the effectiveness of some insecticides in controlling
     the armyworm.  J. Econ. Entomol.  68(4):513-516.

Janes, M. J., and G. L. Greene.  1969.  Control of fall armyworms and corn earworms
     on sweet corn ears in Central and South Florida.  J. Econ. Entomol.  62:1031-3.

Moore, S.,  and D. E. Kuhlman.  1968.  Effectiveness of several organic  phosphate
     insecticides applied as ultra low volume aerial sprays against the true
     armyworm on wheat in Gallatin County, 111.  Proc.  North Central Branch ESA.
     23:154-6.

Tysowsky, Mike, D. H. Brooks, and R. A. Herrett.  July 17, 1975.  Field test
     procedures.  Personal communications.   ICI United States, Inc., P.O. Box  208,
     Goldsboro, North Carolina.  919/736-3030.

Weinman, C.  J., and G. C. Dicker.  1951.  The toxicity of eight organic insecticides
     to the armyworm.  J. Econ. Entomol.  44:547-52.
                                 SUGAR CANE
 Sugarcane borer, D-iatraea saccharalls

      This test method  is intended for the field evaluation  of  the  efficiency
 of  insecticides  for  the control of sugarcane borer, Dlatraea saccharalls.
 Granular insecticide formulations have been recommended  for the past decade for
 the control  of this  pest.  In the most recent years,  interest  has  developed in
 the use of low volume  and conventional sprays for  this purpose.  The development
 of  systemic  insecticides effective for control of  Lepidopterous borers and recent
 advances in  aerial application techniques that permit low volume application of
 several insecticides have made spray programs feasible.


      Crop and Location of Tests:—A variety should be selected that  is commer-
 cially grown in  the  area and that is maintained and planted under  good agricultural
 practice known to be acceptable for the  crop in the test area.  Scientific name
 and variety  of crop  should be recorded.

-------
                                     -33-
     The test site selected should have a previous history of sugarcane borer
infestations.  Soil type should be favorable and free of other pests or problems
that may influence the results.  The test site should be located so drift from
neighboring crops and/or tests could not occur.  The insect population should be
uniform.


     Plot Size and Design:—Small plots are 3 rows by 7 m (24 ft.).  Treatments
should be replicated 4 times.  Treatments should occur in 2-3 week intervals.
At harvest it is suggested that 20 stalks be examined and the number of joints
bored recorded.

     In large plots, it is suggested that 25 to 50 randomly selected stalks be
examined for feeding in the leaf sheath and examined for borer larvae.  Record
the number of live and dead larvae in post-treatment counts.  For pre-treatment
counts, follow the same procedure and correct for check mortality using Abbott's
formula.


     Application and Equipment:—It is suggested that the plots be set up on a
randomized complete block design with treatments replicated 4 times.  More
replications are required in areas where infestations are slight.

     Untreated controls should be used to determine the sugarcane borer population
and to  provide a good comparison for the treatments.  In addition, a recommended
and accepted standard should be used to compare the acceptance of the experimental
compounds on a commercial basis.  If it is impossible to have an untreated control,
then the latter should suffice provided there is an acceptable population of
insects.

     The equipment should be well maintained and cleaned well after each treatment.
In the  case of liquids, water should be run through the system until it is clear
and the granular equipment should be dusted and preferably some non-toxicant
granules run through the machine to avoid contamination of subsequent treatments.
Always  start with the lowest rate to the highest rate.  Using this sequence will
minimize the problem of contamination.

     When applying sprays as a ground broadcast spray, fan-type nozzles properly
spaced  to the nozzle specifications on the boom will provide adequate and thorough
coverage.

     Select amount of finished spray per hectare that compares closely with  commercial
applications for air and ground applications consistent with the various types  of
formulations, i.e. liquid and granular.


     Sampling:—Tests should be initiated just prior to or at the  time larval  feed-
ing begins.  Treatments are usually initiated when  5% of the sugarcane stalks  are
infested with early instar larvae of the second generation.  Applications  should
be made on a 2-3 week interval schedule.  When feasible and on the basis of  the
judgement of the individual investigator, more than one interval should be evaluated.

-------
                                    -34-
     For the small plots at a normal harvest, record the number of bored joints.
In the large plot tests, 25-50 randomly selected stalks should be examined for
signs of feeding in the leaf sheath and for borer larvae, recording the number of
live and dead larvae in post treatment counts.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.


                                 References

Hensley, S. D., and E. J. Concienne.  1968.  Recent developments in insecticidal
     control of the sugarcane borer in Louisiana.  I.S.S.C.T. Proa.  13th Congress,
     Taiwan.  Elsevier Publishing Company, Amsterdam.

Hensley, S. D., E. J. Concienne, W. J. McCormick, and L. J. Charpentier.  1967.
     Azodrin - a new promising insecticide for control of the sugarcane borer
     in Louisiana.  Sugar Bull.  45(8):110-114.

Long, W. H., E. J. Concienne, L. D. Newsome, S. D. Hensley, and R. Mathes.  1958.
     Recommendations for controlling the sugarcane borer.  Sugar Bull.  26(10) : 129-130.
                                 SUNFLOWERS
 Sunflower Moth, Homoeosoma eleatellum

      Sunflowers are grown under a wide range of conditions in California,
 Minnesota,  the Dakotas and Texas with an approximate acreage of 500,000-600,000;
 however, statistics show quite an acreage variation from year to year.  The
 acreage has increased over the years and now represents a significant acreage  of
 a high-cash crop.  The sunflower moth, Homoeosoma eleotellum, is considered a
 major pest  of sunflowers.


      Crop and Location of Tests:—The test plants should be a commercial hybrid
 of the hybrid sunflower, Heli-anthus annuus L., and one that is commonly grown  in
 the test area.  If possible, select a variety that is known to be  susceptible  to
 the sunflower moth.  Planting time is important; a little later planting will  in-
 crease the  insect population but usually decrease quality and yield.  However,
 this does not apply to the Texas high plains.

      The test site should be typical of the area in which the crop is grown com-
 mercially.   Soil type should be uniform and prepared with a cultural method
 consistent  with growing the crop commercially.  For the test area  the crop should
 be fertilized and irrigated if necessary, but maintained under good agricultural
 practice for the crop in the area the test is located.  Attempts should be made
 to locate plots in close proximity to shelterbelts, grassed waterways, roadside
 ditches, etc., to maximize possible insect infestations.  Because  of the environment
 and insect  behavior, a minimum of two locations for each study is  suggested.

-------
                                     -35-
     Climatic conditions will cause wide variation in the insect populations,
and hence as many locations as possible should be used to provide reliable results.


     Plot Size and Design:—The use of statistically designed test plots in
sunflower pest evaluation, in the eyes of the authorities, is one of personal
choice.  Some use randomized complete block designs and some use simple plot
techniques designed around the insect population with a given field.

     At least four replications should be used per treatment and more replications
may be necessary where the insect population is moderate to light.

     Each replicate should have the same number of plants and be the same size
and, in the case of sunflowers, for small plots at least, a minimum of 3 m (10 ft.)
fallow buffer is maintained on all sides of each plot.

     For small plots the initial year to two years of study:  the plots will depend
on insect population with plots in the area of six rows [100 cm (40 in.)/row] by
16.32 m (54.4 ft.) in length (1/10 of a hectare) (1/40 acre).  Plots of this size
are not too large and yet will be adequate if yield information is desired at this
stage of insecticide evaluation.

     Large plots:  it is again up to the individual researcher, but usually plots
of this nature will run from 0.4-4 ha (1-10 acres) in size.  In these plots it is
recommended that buffer areas of at least 7.5 m (25 ft.) be used.

     For aerially sprayed plots a minimum of five acres is used and two-three
replicates are suggested.  Because of the size of the plot, untreated checks are
not recommended and the use of a recommended standard foliar insecticide is con-
sidered adequate.


     Application and Equipment:—Most of the work has been done with six-row
sprayers [100 cm (40 in.)/row] over the top.  The procedure and equipment to use
should approximate commercial equipment, and the amount of spray solution and
pressure used should be consistent with that used commercially.  Small plots are
at the discretion of the researcher himself, and small equipment well proven as
research equipment will suffice.  The research should, when using different rates,
progress from low rates to high rates to minimize contamination when moving from
one rate to another.  Sprayers should be thoroughly cleaned after application of
each treatment.  Take safety precautions.


     Sampling;—Methods used for making control evaluations vary tremendously
from one researcher to the next.  There should be 2, 3 or 4 applications usually,
and after the last application a minimum of 100 heads should be cut and taken to
the laboratory for evaluation for insect numbers and damage.  Applications should
begin when 20% of the heads are in the flower stage.  Some researchers use the
DeVac machine, and when it is used, results should be presented as for other methods.
However, its value in sunflower moth evaluations has not been established.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.

-------
                                    -36-
                                 RefeTences

Adams, A. L., and J.  C.  Gaines .   1950.   Sunflower insect control.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  43:181-84.

Carlson, E. C.  1967.  Control of sunflower moth larvae and their damage to
     sunflower seeds.  J.  Econ.  Entcmol.   60:1068-71.

Criswell, T. M.  July 29,  1975.   Personal communication.  Velsicol Chemical
     Corporation, Marlin,  Texas.

Knowles, P- P., and W. H.  Lange.  1954.  The sunflower moth.  Calif. Agric.
Muma, M. H.  1950.  Control tests on sunflower insects in Nebraska.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  43:477-80.

Phillips, R. L., N. M. Randolph, and G. L. Teetes.  1973.  Seasonal abundance
     and nature of damage of insects attacking cultivated sunflowers.  Texas
     Agric. Exp. Stn. MP-1116.  Texas A&M University, College Station, Texas.

Schulz, J. T.  July 22, 1975.  Personal communication.  Department of Entomology,
     North Dakota State University, Fargo, North Dakota 58012.

Teetes, George L., M. L. Kenman, and N. M. Randolph.  1971.  Differences in
     susceptibility of certain sunflower varieties and hybrids to the sunflower
     moth.  J. Econ. Entomol.  64(5) : 1285-1287 -

Unger, P. W. , A. R. Jones, and R. R. Allen.  1975.  Sunflower experiments at
     Bushland on the Texas High Plains, 1974.  Prog. Rep. Texas Agric. Exp. Stn.
     Texas A&M University, College Station, Texas.
                                   TOBACCO
 Tobacco  Budworm, Eeliothis virescens, Tobacco Hornworm, Manduca sexta,  and
 Cabbage  Looper, Trichoplusia ni

     Tobacco  is a fairly localized restricted acreage luxury crop which is  very
 susceptible to attack by several phytophagous insects, the most important of
 which  include Lepidopterous, Coleopterous and Homopterous species.

     It  is important to determine the levels of pest populations in  commercial
 fields and, wherever possible, include a comparison with a standard  product.

     Although this protocol deals with evaluation methods, it  nevertheless  should
 be  pointed out that smoke flavor tests and resulting residues  in green  and  cured
 tobacco  should be considered very early in the evaluation program.

-------
                                     -37-
     Crop and Location of Tests:—The tests should be set up on a variety that
is grown commercially in the area and, preferrably, tests should be set up to
cover different varieties, since each one can react differently to insecticides.
If different varieties are used, however, each variety should be checked individ-
ually and as a separate test.  The crop in the selected test site should be planted,
grown and maintained in accordance with the accepted practice for the crop.

     Soil that is typical, uniform and suitable for the growth of tobacco should
be selected.  The test site should be so selected that it is relatively free of
drift from pesticide treatments of neighboring crops.

     Climatic conditions are very important, and optimum conditions such as rainfall,
temperature and soil moisture are all conducive to high insect populations when
good to ideal.  Tobacco is very susceptible to climatic conditions, and adverse
conditions can produce plant symptoms which are often confused with insect damage
such as stinkbugs, which are commonly called dry weather sun scald.


     Application and Equipment:—Use a randomized complete block design.  Use at
least 4 replications per treatment.  More replications will be needed if the insect
infestation is light.  Each plot should be 2 rows wide by 9.6-12 m long for small
plots and preliminary evaluation, and twice that size for more advanced evaluations.

     In the case of budworms, it is usually necessary to make at least two or more
applications at weekly intervals until flower buds appear.  Treatments should begin
when budworms of any size are found on 5 or more plants out of 50 any time prior to
flowering.

     Hornworms are easily controlled and treatments are justified when 5 or more
hornworms 2.5 cm  (1 in.) or longer are found per 50 plants.

     The cabbage looper, which  is becoming increasingly more important as a tobacco
pest, can occur throughout  the  development of the  tobacco plant since there is
more than one generation per season.  Damage is to the leaves as opposed to the
bud  for the hornworms and budworms.  The larvae is the only damaging stage and  eats
ragged holes in the leaves.

     Equipment should be cleaned well before each  application and  treatments  should
be made so  that the rates progress from  the lowest to  the highest  concentration.
Use  one full cone nozzle  30-45  cm  (12-18 in.) over the top  of each row  and apply
a minimum of pressure, i.e.  1-1.4 kgm/cm2  (15-20 psi).


     Sampling:—All plants  should be  checked in both  the  treated  and  check plots
and  there should be at least one larva per plant  to  consider  that  plant infested.
Record  infested plants and,  on  post  treated counts,  new  damage  to  leaf  surface
areas  should be checked.  Post  treatment counts  in shade  tobacco  should be made
every  7 days, and  on  flue cured tobacco  every 14  days.

     A high degree  of  control  is necessary, since  the insect  damage will signifi-
cantly  reduce  the  value  of  the  crop.  Control should  be  at  least  90%,  although in
many cases  a  lower  percentage  is  often accepted by the grower,  but he  is usually
"docked"  significantly  in the  purchase  price.

      See  also  Introduction  - General Methods.

-------
                                    -38-
Green Peach Aphid,  Myzus persioae,  and Tobacco Flea Beetle, Epitrix hirtipennis

     The green peach aphid,  Myzus persicae,  is usually a problem throughout the
growing season, but will decrease as the plants become more mature and weather
conditions are not optimum for its  development late in the season.


     Application and Equipment:—All insecticides should be thoroughly applied
beginning in the early stages of the crop, and test can be continued throughout
the normal growing season.  Use up  to 57-95  1/ha, less for the small plants and
the maximum amount as the plants approach maturity.  Use 2-2.1 kgm/cm^ (25-31 psi)
when making application using a cone nozzle.


     Sampling:—For the performance evaluation of the green peach aphid, actual
insect counts per leaf can be made.  The counts should be made 4 leaves down from
the bud, selecting a leaf 7.5 cm (20 in.) long or longer.  The right half of the
dorsal upper surface between the fourth and  fifth lateral veins should be used
and all the aphids in that area should be counted.

     Tobacco flea beetle, Epitrix hirtipennis, performance evaluation for early
season should include an evaluation of the number of holes in leaves of the check
plant and all the leaves on at least 10 plants, or examination of enough plants
in the check plot to yield a total  of 50 holes recorded.  An equal number of plants
in the treated plots should be examined and  the number of holes counted and recorded,

     See also Introduction - General Methods.


                                 References

Anonymous.  1958.  Flue Cured Tobacco; Diseases, Nutrient Deficiencies and Excesses,
     Injurious Pests of Cured Tobacco.  American Tobacco Company, 245 Park Ave.,
     NY 10017.

Anonymous.  1973.  Georgia and tobacco.  America's Industrial Growth.  (Tobacco
     History Series, first ed.)   The Tobacco Institute, 1776 K Street N.W. ,
     Washington, D.C.

Bennett, R. B. , S. N. Hawks, and J. W. Glover.  1964.  Curing Tobacco "Flue-Cured".
     North Carolina Agric. Ext.  Serv., Ext.  Circ. No. 444.

Collins, W. R. , S. N. Hawks, Jr., B. 0. Rittrell, R. L. Robertson, F. A. Todd, and
     R. Watkins.  1972.  Tobacco Information for 1973.  North Carolina Agric.
     Ext. Serv., Misc. Publ. No. 90.

Kyle, Melvin L.  Personal communication.  Velsicol Chemical Corporation, Lynnfield
     Office Park, 1255 Lynnfield Road, Memphis, Tennessee.

Mistrick, Walter.  1975.  Personal  communication.  Department of Entomology, North
     Carolina State University,  Raleigh, North Carolina.

-------
                                     -39-
Mistrick, W. J.,  and  F. D.  Smith.   1971.   Control  of  tobacco budworm  on  flue
     cured  tobacco with insecticides  applied  mechanically.  J. Econ.  Entomol.
     64:126-32.

Reagan, T.  E.,  R. L.  Rabb,  and W.  K.  Collins.   1974.   Tobacco budworms:   Influence
     of early  tapping and  sucker  control  practices on infestations  in flue  cured
     tobacco.   J. Econ. Entomol.   67(4):551-52.
                            WHEAT, TvitiQ-um  spp.

     The following  suggested methodology  for evaluating pesticides for the control
of foliar invertebrate pests of wheat  is  identical  in general parameters to the
testing of  insecticides  for efficacy on corn as described previously in this volume
The differences occur in the sampling  procedures  following  the specific pest.  See
Field Crops - Corn  for general parameters.
Greenbug, Seh'izaph'ls graminum  (Rondoni)

     The aphids  feed on  the  leaves  and  stem of  the wheat plant and inject a toxic
saliva which causes discoloration and tissue destruction.  When conditions are
favorable for greenbug outbreaks the infestation may spread rapidly and the entire
field may be killed.

     The stage of  the crop at  application depends upon  insect infestation, from
emergence through  heading.   The most common crop stage  for greenbug attack is the
tillering stage.

     The stage of  the insect at application is  all life stages whenever population
densities of beneficial  insects are insufficient to prevent greenbug outbreaks.

     The interval  between application is 3-7 days and the number of applications
varies from 1-3.


     Sampling:—Pre-treatment  and post-treatment greenbug counts are made by
counting the total number of all stages of greenbugs present in 0.30 m (1 ft.) of
linear drill row of wheat.   At least 5-10 such  counts are made for each treatment
per replication  (block)  at randomly selected counting stations.  Usually one pre-
treatment count is made  and  3-4 post-treatment  counts are made on a schedule of
ca. 1, 3, 7, 14 days.  The number of important  parasites and predators should be
recorded at each counting station.

     Yield data are collected  by hand harvesting 0.0004 ha. (0.001 acre) areas
within each treatment per replication (block).  The heads are threshed and the
grain weighed and  converted  to kg/ha (Ibs/acre).

-------
                                    -40-
                                 Referenoes
Daniels, N.  E.   1970.   Greenbug control with foliar applications in wheat and
     grain sorghum, Bushland,  1969.   Texas Agric.  Exp.  Stn. Progr.  Rep.  2757:5-7,

Ward, C. R. ,  J. C.  Owens, D.  Ashdown, E. W. Huddleston, and W. E. Turner.  1972.
     Greenbug control on wheat in 1967-69.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.  65:764-766.
                                WINTER WHEAT
Pale Western Cutworm, Agrotis ovthogonia

     The pale western cutworm, Agrotis orthogonia,  is a serious pest of winter
wheat throughout most of the Great Plains of the United States and prairie region
of western Canada, particularly during years of dry weather.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—The test plants should be a variety that is
grown commercially in the test area and known to be susceptible to cutworms.
Varieties such as "Lancer" or "Scout" may be used.

     For best results select a dryland field where the soil type is uniform.  The
crop, winter wheat, should be planted consistent with a cultural method that is
typical for the crop in the test area.  It should be so selected that it is free
of drift from pesticide treatments to neighboring crops.

     Climatic conditions are very important, as dry spring weather favors cutworm
survival; excessive moisture promotes bacterial and fungus diseases that attack
the larvae and may give complete control.  Excessive moisture also drives the larvae
to the soil surface and exposes the cutworm larvae to parasites and predators.


     Application and Equipment:—Use a randomized complete block design.  Use at
least four replicates approximately .01 ha (1/40 acre).  Plots should be larger
if populations are light.  For large ground plots where compounds are in the
advanced development stage plots of .4-.8 ha (1-2 acres) are acceptable.  Air plots
should be larger, each swath about 12 m (40 ft.) with at least 3 swaths per
treatment.

     For small plots, a portable boom backpack sprayer with pressure regulator
and compressed air cylinder may be used in .01 ha (1/40 acre) plots.  Use 2 kgm/cm2
(30 psi) and 57 1 per ha (15 gals/acre).


     Sampling:—Population densities are determined at various post-treatment
intervals by examining four 0.3 m2 (1 ft.2) samples of soil in each plot to a
depth of 10 cm (4 in.).  Soil from each samples is hand-sifted through a screen
and larvae counted.  Percent control is determined by population reduction versus
the check.

-------
                                     -41-
     At harvest, wheat samples may be obtained for yield data by hand-cutting
four 2.5 m (8 ft.) rows randomly selected from the center of each plot.  Samples
can be processed through a stationary thresher, after which the seed is chained,
weighed and yields converted to kg/ha (Ib/acre).  All data should be analyzed
statistically by applying the F test and treatment means separated by applying
Duncan's Multiple Range Test at the 5% level.

     See also Introduction - General Methods.
                                 References

DePew, L. J.  1970.  Further studies on pale western cutworm control in Kansas
     1968-69.  J. Eoon. Entomol.   63(6):1842-44.

DePew, L. J., and T. L. Harvey.  1957.  Toxicity of certain insecticides for
     control of pale western cutworm attacking wheat in Kansas.  J. Eoon. Entomol.
     50(5):640-42.

Jacobson, L. H., and S. McDonald.   1966.  Chemical control of the pale western
     cutworm infesting wheat in Alberta, -Canada.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  59(4):965-67,

Pfadt, R. E.  1956.  Control of pale western cutworm in wheat.  J. Eoon. Entomol.
     49(2):145-47.

-------
                                  -42-
                             FORAGE  CROPS
     Forage crops and especially alfalfa  support  a  wide variety of insects
and these include species destructive to  forage and other crops, pollinating
insects, species that inhabit the forage  because  of the lush growth but
have very little effect on the crop,  and  many predators and parasites of
forages or other neighboring crops.   It is suggested that the field evalu-
ation of invertebrate control agents  should take  this variety of insect
species into consideration.  In many  cases an evaluation test applied for
one species will yield data on other  pest and beneficial species if these
are sampled and counted at the time data  are being  collected for the major
species being evaluated.

     Throughout the suggested practices,  we will  attempt to recommend
minimums for small plot evaluations.   Large scale tests with ground equip-
ment should be applied on minimum 2.02 hectares (5  acre) plots.

     Minimum plot size for air application should normally consist of at
least three passes of the plane with  samples taken in the middle swath.
Spray volume is important in air application and  reference is made to
Wilson and Armbrust (1968).

     In all cases, evaluations should be  made under ideal application con-
ditions and with equipment that is in good working order and properly cali-
brated to give good coverage of the forage.  Sampling of certain life
stages of some pests is difficult and time consuming.  Care should be
taken to conduct sampling within the  central area of the plot with con-
sideration for edge buffer zones within the plot.  In all cases a repli-
cated pretreatment sample should be taken within the test field.  It is
not necessary to sample each plot. With species that are widely distribu-
ted, it is generally felt that evaluations should be conducted in major
use areas with 2-3 test sites per area.
Alfalfa Weevil and Egyptian Alfalfa Weevil

     Because the alfalfa weevil, Eypera post-tea (Gyllenhal) and the
Egyptian alfalfa weevil,Hypera bTunneipennis (Boheman) are the most im-
portant single insect pest species of alfalfa in the United States, we
will emphasize suggested methods for these two pests.
      Crop Variety and Location of Tests:—The alfalfa variety should be
 one  that is  susceptible to damage from the particular insect pest species
 under test and  should be a variety commonly grown in the geographic area
 of the test  site.  A pure stand of alfalfa would be desirable for testing
 but  in many  geographic areas alfalfa is commonly planted mixed with other
 forages such as clovers and grasses.  In these cases or those where vol-
 untary forages  have invaded an originally pure stand, a plant composition
 sample of the stand should be taken and each forage type including weeds

-------
                                   -43-
should be reported as a percentage.  The test should be located In an area
where the weevil has been economically Important for at least one previous
year.


     Experimental Design:—A valid experimental design should be used and
we suggest the randomized complete-block design with a minimum of three
replications per treatment.  Plot size will depend on which life stage
is being controlled and for how long.  For larval control many researchers
have used a minimum plot size of 3.05 X 6.10 meters  (10 X 20 ft.).

     Because of adult movements within a field and into a field, data to
determine initial adult control should only be collected up to 24 or 48
hrs after the application.  Niemczyk and Flessel (1969) obtained satis-
factory results with 0.04 hectare  (1/10 acre) plots.  To determine the
effectiveness of adult control programs over an extended period of time,
Wilson and Armbrust  (1970) and Niemczyk and Flessel  (1969, 1970) used
entire fields or a plot size of several acres with the remainder of the
field being treated with a recommended adulticide.


     Application and Equipment:—Spray applications  rather than granular
applications appear  to give better coverage of the chemical unless a low
percentage granular  formulation is used.  Most researchers feel that a
minimum of 7.57 decaliters per acre  (20 gallons) of  finished spray should
be used on first-crop alfalfa at 13.8 Newton's per meter2 (20 p.s.i.).
For spraying regrowth after harvest, 3.79 decaliters per 0.4 hectare
 (10 gallons per acre) is usually sufficient.


     Sampling:—Population densities of each stage of the weevil are very
 time consuming  to  obtain and usually not necessary for comparing one
 treatment with  another on a relative basis.

     For most  relative larval sampling the  standard  3.8-decimeter  (15-
 inch) diameter  sweep net is used.  It is swung across the top of the al-
 falfa the way  in which the pendulum of a clock swings,  One sweep  is equal
 to one pass of  the net and the return is counted as  the second sweep
 (Armbrust  et al.   1969).  The number of sweeps should be adjusted  to the
 population levels  so numbers of insects obtained are valid for statistical
 analysis.  Results should be reported on the basis of mean number  of in-
 sects collected per  sweep.

     Adult sampling  is difficult because at certain  times and under some
 conditions, it  is  difficult  to obtain meaningful numbers.  We suggest
 that the number of sweeps per plot be adjusted so  that valid counts of
 adults are obtained.

     Additional sampling methods,  comparison of methods, and processing of
 samples are reported by  Callahan  et  al.  (1966), Cothran and Summers  (1972),
 Pass and Van Meter  (1966) and  Stevens and  Steinhauer (1973).

     When  researchers  (Armbrust  et al.  1969) are  evaluating the  performance
 of insecticide treatments applied  as  larval sprays,  counts are  usually

-------
                                  -44-
made at pretreatment and at 3,  14,  and 21 days after application.  Where
more precise performance data are needed, additional sampling at 7, 10,
12 and 16 days after application is suggested.  An estimate of percent
of the foliage missing at each sampling data is further suggested.

     Alfalfa yields in small plots are sometimes difficult to obtain
because of plant variation and density within a stand of alfalfa and be-
cause of the presence of weeds.  Hintz (1974) and Koehler and Rosenthal
(1975) have obtained satisfactory results and their methods are suggested.
A high percentage of feed nutrients in alfalfa are contained in the leaves
which weigh very little in comparison to the bulky stems which contain
a large amount of fibrous material of low nutrient value.  Thus alfalfa
weight records alone can be very misleading as an indicator of market
value.  Chemical analysis for protein is a good indicator of feed value
and should be combined with weight records to assess pest damage.  Pro-
tein can be determined by the method given in the 10th edition, 1965
Official Methods of Analysis, page 16, 2.044,


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Data means should be compared using
a valid statistical test for significance such as Duncan's new multiple-
range test or Tukey's w-procedure.   Treatment performance should be com-
pared with untreated forage and one or more standard labeled insecticides
that are recommended for the particular geographic test location.

     The following data should be reported:

     Insect population counts recorded as number of insects per sweep.

     Insecticide formulation used and amount of active toxicant per hectare.

     Amount of spray per hectare and the type of equipment.

     Plant height and percent of foliage missing at time of treatment
and on each sampling date.

     Phytotoxicity rating.

     Temperature and general weather conditions at time of treatment.

     Rain measurement within 48 hours following treatment.


                                References

Armbrust, E. J. , H. D. Niemczyk, B. C. Pass, and M. C. Wilson.  1969.
     Standardized procedures adopted for cooperative Ohio Valley states
     alfalfa weevil research.  J. Eoon.  Entomol. 62(1):250-251.

Callahan, R. A., F. R. Holbrook, and F.  R. Shaw,  1966.  A comparison of
     sweeping and vacuum collecting certain insects affecting forage
     crops.  J. Econ. Entomol.   59(2):478-479 .

-------
                                   -45-
Cothran, W. R., and C. G. Summers.  1972.  Sampling for the Egyptian
     alfalfa weevil:  A comment on the sweep-net method.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  65(3):689-691.

Hintz, T. R.   1974.  The impact of the alfalfa weevil on the alfalfa
     crop.  Proc.  N.  Central Br.  ESA   29:167-168.

Koehler, C. S., and S. S. Rosenthal.  1975.  Economic injury levels
     of the Egyptian alfalfa weevil or the alfalfa weevil.  J.  Econ.
     Entomol.  68(1):71-75.

Niemczyk, H. D., and J. K.  Flessel.  1969.  Development and testing
     of a preventive program for control of the alfalfa weevil in
     Ohio.  J. Econ. Entomol.  62(5):1197-1202.

Niemczyk, H. D., and J. K.  Flessel.  1970.  Further testing of in-
     secticides for a preventive program for control of alfalfa weevil.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  63:1330-1332.

Pass, B. C., and C. L. Van  Meter.  1966.  A method for extracting eggs
     of the alfalfa weevil  from stems df alfalfa.   J. Econ. Entomol.
     58(5):1294.

Stevens, L. M., and A. L. Steinhauer.  1973.  Evaluating the D-Vac as
     a sampling tool for the alfalfa weevil adult.  J. Econ. Entomol.
        66:1328-1329.

Wilson, M. C., and E. J. Armbrust.  1968.  Chemical control of the
     alfalfa weevil in Illinois and Indiana.  II.   The importance of
     spray volume in aerial application.  J. Econ. Entomol. 61(5) :
     1201-1203.

Wilson, M. C., and E. J. Armbrust.  1970.  Approach to integrated
     control of the alfalfa weevil.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.  63:554-557.
Weevil Parasites

     Most weevil parasites are parasitic in the larval stage.  Of these,
Bathyplectes curcul-ionis  (Thomson)  is more wide-spread than any others
and occurs wherever HypeTa postica is found.  Many other parasite species
have been listed by Brunson and Coles(1968).

     Because peak parasite activity may not always occur at the time of
insecticide applications for weevil control, separate tests may be neces-
sary to determine effects on parasites.  Field data are extremely diffi-
cult to obtain because of adult parasite movements between treated plots
and from untreated areas.  Spray applications should be applied during
adult activity and net counts made at 24 and 48 hrs  after application.
Counts made after 48 hrs would reflect emergence of untreated adult para-
sites and movements of adults into the treated alfalfa from untreated
areas or other plots.

-------
                                  -46-
     Researchers are suggested to refer to Davis (1970) for further details
of insecticide control of weevils with resulting effects on parasites.
Care should be taken not to use percent parasitism differences between
treatments as an indication that one insecticide over another is less
detrimental to the parasite.  These differences, besides reflecting initial
parasite kill, may also result from different parasite-host ratios during
the post-treatment period.


                                References

Brunson, M. H., and L. W. Coles.  1968.  The introduction, release, and
     recovery of parasites of the alfalfa weevil in eastern United
     States.  Prod. Res. Rep. No. 101. 3-12.

Davis, D. W.  1970.  Insecticidal control of the alfalfa weevil in
     northern Utah and some resulting effects on the weevil parasite
     Bathypleotes curculionis.  J. Boon. Entomol. 63:119-125.
Spittlebugs

     Crop and Test Site:—Spittlebugs are commonly found on alfalfa, red
clover and birdsfoot trefoil.  Spittlebugs have been abundant in the
Eastern and North Central States.  These insects produce little masses
of white froth around themselves and the stems of alfalfa, clover, and
other plants from which they suck sap through their sharp beaks.  The young
bugs begin feeding very  early in the growing season and cause surprising
losses in yield  (USDA 1952).  Control of the nymphal stage is easier to
evaluate than control of the adults.  The latter move readily until egg
laying takes place and evaluation of adult control would require large
plots.

     The plots for evaluation of control of the nymphs can be as small as
6.1 x 6.1 meters  (20 x 20 feet).  The randomized complete-block design
with 4-6 replications per treatment is suggested.
     Applications and Equipment:—Spray applications are usually made at
 the  first  sign of spittle.  This will appear as a single, small teardrop.
 Applications are best made with a low pressure type sprayer with 3.79 to
 7.57 decaliters  (10 to 20 gallons) of spray per 0.4 hectare (acre).
      Sampling:—Counts should be made before the new adults appear.  We
 recommend  counts at pretreatment and 3, 7, 16 days after application.
 Counts  should reflect the number of spittlebugs/meter2.
     Analysis  and Reporting of Data:—Same as for weevil except insect
 counts  reported  on a meter2 or ft2 basis.

-------
                                   -47-
Potato Leafhopper


     Crop Variety and Locaticm of Tegts;^-The potato leafhopper does much
damage to alfalfa.  It is a pale-green, soft-bodied, wedge-shaped winged
insect only about one-eighth inch long when full-grown.  It often becomes
extremely abundant on these crops and sucks the sap out of the leaves,
causing them to turn reddish yellow and die (USDA 1952).

     Evaluate on alfalfa, red clover, ladino clover, or birdsfoot trefoil.


     Experimental Design;—Adult hoppers move rapidly so sizeable plots
are necessary.  Some researchers have found that minimum size plots of
6.10 x 12.2 meters(20 x 40 feet) are adequate with 4-6 replications per
treatment.
     Application and Equipment:—Apply the spray when populations of
nymphs reach 1-2 per 20 sweeps and use a low pressure type sprayer.


     Sampling:—Count only nymphs from sweeps taken in plots.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Same as above.



Aphids

     Use same test procedure as for potato leafhoppers.



European Chafer, White Grubs, Clover Root Borer and Sitona Species


     Crop Variety and Test Site:—Evaluate insecticides for these soil
insects on susceptible crops and varieties.


     Experimental Design:—Because the immature stages move very little the
plots can be relatively small  (3.05 x 3.05 meters)  (10 x 10 feet).  Research-
ers have found that randomized complete blocks or Latin Square designs are
adequate with 4 replications per treatment.


     Application and Equipment:—Use low pressure type sprayer or granular
applicators.


     Sampling:—Usually 3-5 square foot samples taken per plot to depth of
1 foot in the fall are satisfactory for the European Chafer.  Where white

-------
grubs are heavy in permanent pasture, they can be counted on a square
foot or meter basis after pealing back the pod.  For the clover root
borer, 10 roots per treatment is usually a satisfactory sample.  These
should be washed, dissected for borers and the root injury scored on a
scale of 1-4.
     Analysis and Reporting _q_f__Data:--Same as above.



Seed Chalcids and Plant Bugs


     Crop Variety and Test Site:—Same as above.
     Experimental Design:--Small plots of 6.1 x 6,1 meters (20 x 20 feet)
are satisfactory for seed chalcids but larger plots of 12.2 x 12.2 meters
(40 x 40 feet) are needed for plant bugs.
     Application and Equipment:--Same as above.


     Sampling:—For seed chalcids, harvest seed pods at random from 3-5
sites per plot.  Counts are made by splitting the pods to determine shriveled
vs. plump seeds.  Seeds should be held until chalcids emerge.

     For plant bugs count only the nymphs sampled with a sweep net.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Same as above.


                                 Reference

U. S. Dept. of Agriculture.  1952.  Insects Yearbook of Agriculture. 780 p.

-------
                                   -49-
                                 PANGELAND
     The low value of rangeland forage, the rough terrain, and the vast
acreages involved usually necessitates -aerial application of insecticides
in almost all instances.  Many of the species of insects which damage range-
land forage are quite mobile and this vagility, plus the variability in
population densities and the necessity of evaluating aerial application,
has led to the use of large (20 to 259 ha) plots for efficacy testing.
Plot size often must be reduced in mountain or forest rangeland.

     Careful attention should be given to the overall efficacy evaluation
program to insure that the tests in different areas are a part of the same
experimental design so that the number of replicates at a given site can
be reduced.  Sub-plots are often selected at random within the large plots
to improve efficiency.  Care should be given to selecting plot locations
which will not involve spray applications over ponds or water courses un-
less it is the intention of the researcher to monitor for pesticides in
those areas.

     Insecticides in the development stage where crop destruction is required
present a unique problem.  In large pastures, electric fences and/or burn-
ing, where practical, may be required.  Where possible, rapid determination
of pesticide residue levels can be used to determine whether the  crop can
be utilized or if it must be destroyed.

     Minimum plot size for aerial application will usually be three swaths
wide by long enough to assume sustained level flight of the aircraft.  Plots
must be long enough to allow for variation in initiation of spray at each
end.  Plot size may be reduced by the use of smaller, slower aircraft.
Width of plots or separation between plots must be adequate to prevent
drift onto adjacent plots.  Preliminary "screening" can be accomplished
by low pressure-low volume sprayers.  Minimum plot size is dictated by  the
mobility of the insect species involved.  Border treatment with pesticides
labeled for the particular use can be used to further reduce plot size.

     Insecticides should be applied with carefully calibrated equipment
under acceptable weather conditions.  To make certain of this, more than
one day may be required for aerial application of several treatments.
Grasshoppers
     Crop Variety and Location of Tests:—Species composition of the vege-
tation and the terrain are usually dictated by the location of economic
infestations of the pest.  Care should be given to uniformity of vegetation
and terrain among treatments.  Proximity to watering sites will affect for-
age utilization and distribution of livestock.

-------
                                  -50-
     Experimental Design:—At least two replicates, with several sub-plots
per replicate should be the minimum.  The use of only one plot per  treat-
ment may be acceptable when circumstances dictate and prior approval has
been given by the Environmental Protection Agency.  Whether or not  untreated
control plots are used, the incorporation of a recommended standard insecti-
cide treatment is suggested.

     Plots as small as 1.62 hectares (4 acres) or 35.3 x 457.7 meters
(116 x 1502 ft.), separated from each other by similar size strips  have been
used for aerial application for grasshopper control in alfalfa, however,
problems of migration of grasshoppers from untreated adjacent rangeland have
been encountered (Jones and Kantack 1973).  The same authors used 3.64 hectare
(9 acre) plots which were 91.4 x 396.1 meters (300 x 1300 ft.) adjoining, each
other to reduce this effect.  Skoog et al. (1965) used 16.2 hectare (40 acre)
plots (H x V( mile) with the Piper Pawnee, 64.8 hectare (160 acre) plots (^ mile
x % mile) with a Stearman and 518.4 hectare (1280 acre) plots (2x1 mile)
with a TBM.  In another study, 32.4 hectare (80 acre) plots (k x ^ mile)
were used with flight heights of 15.2 and 30.4 meters (50 and 100 ft.); 129.6
hectare  (320 acre) plots (% x 1 mile) were used with flight heights of 60.8
meters  (200 ft.) (Skoog and Cowan 1968).  Holmes et al. (1965), in  Canada, used
1.2 hectare  (3 acre) plots  (100 x 145 yds) for ground application with a low
pressure-low volume sprayer equipped with nozzles 50.8 cm (20 in.)  apart on
a 9.14 meter  (30 ft.) boom with the sprayer calibrated to deliver 37.4 liters/
hectare  (4 gal./acre).


     Application and Equipment:—Aerial  application equipment  designed and
evaluated for the aircraft  being used should be  properly  calibrated.  Air-
craft designation;  boom size and length;  number,  size of  nozzle,  or  atomizers
and position on aircraft;  pressure;  aircraft speed;  height and swath width;
type of solvent;  concentration of  solution and quantity of solution  used
should be reported.   Dye cards for evaluation  of  deposit  uniformity  are re-
commended.   Flight runs made crosswind usually increase the  uniformity of
deposits.  Applications should be  made under conditions that avoid  exces-
sive convection currents.
     Sampling:—Population densities of grasshoppers are usually evaluated
with the visualized square foot technique with (Skoog et al.  1965) or with-
out (Jones and Kantack 1973) teasing.   Other workers have used the square
yard as a sampling unit.   The number of square feet sampled varies from 25
in 1.62 hectare (4 acre)  plots to 100 in larger plots.   Samples are taken
along transects that divide the plot into thirds (Skoog et al. 1968) or
through the center section and at diagonals to the line of flight (Jones
and Kantack 1973).  The edge effect produced by migration from untreated
areas may be especially pronounced in grasshopper studies.

     Sampling at approximately the same time of day and under similar
weather conditions can be used to reduce variation (Jones and Kantack 1973).

     Jones and Kantack (1973), citing Anderson (1961),  state  that areas
sampled should be disturbed as little as possible to minimize changes in grass-
hopper distribution and activity.

-------
                                   -51-
     Holmes et al.  (1965) used a standard 3.8-decimeter (15 inch) sweep net
with three sweepers each taking 30 sweeps in a 1.2 hectare (3 acre) plot.

     Grasshopper counts should be taken immediately prior to the treatment
three days and seven days after treatment.  Additional information may be
gained by sampling one or two days after treatment.


     Analysis _and_^eporjting_ of Data:—Where possible, treatment means should
be compared using a valid statistical test for significance.   The standard
material used in private-state-federal control programs in the geographic
area should be included.  Replicated untreated plots are also recommended.

     The following data should be reported:

     Description of terrain, and dominant vegetation, including plant
height, stage and condition at time of treatment.

     Insecticide formulation used, kilograms active toxicant/hectare and
liters/hectare of spray.

     Describe equipment in detail (type of aircraft or application equip-
ment, speed, height, swath width,  type, number and arrangement of nozzles
or other apparatus, etc.

     Ground surface temperature, air temperature at 1.22 meters (4 ft.),
wind velocity, and general weather conditions including rainfall amounts
and interval after treatment.

     Grasshopper populations, including dominant species and life cycle
stages, immediately prior to treatment, three and seven days after
treatment.

     Plant response, phytotoxicity and other observations.
                                References

Anderson, N. L.  1961.  Seasonal losses in rangeland vegetation due to
     grasshoppers.  J. Econ. Entomol.   54:369-78.

Crowell, H. H.  1975.  Professor of Entomology, Department of Entomology,
     Oregon State University.  Personal communication.

Holmes, N. D., D. S.  Smith, S. McDonald, G. E. Swailes, and L. K. Peterson.
     1965.  Evaluation of three alternative insecticides for control of
     grasshoppers in Alberta.  J. Econ. Entomol-.   58:77-79.

Jones, P- A.  1975.   Technical Director, Agricultural Chemical Division,
     FMC of Canada Ltd.  Personal communication.

Jones, P. A. and B. H. Kantack.  1973.  Grasshopper control tests in South
     Dakota, 1966-1967.  J. Econ. Entomol.  66:987-988.

-------
                                   -52-
Nielson, G. L.  1975.   Chief, Division of Plant Industries, New Mexico
     Department of Agriculture.   Personal communication.

Skoog, F. E., F. T. Cowan, and K.Messinger.   1965.  Ultra-low-volume
     aerial spraying of dieldrin and malathion for rangeland grasshopper
     control.  J.  Econ. Entomol,  58:559-651.

Skoog, F. E., and F. T. Cowan,  1968.  Flight height, droplet size and
     moisture influence on grasshopper control achieved with malathion
     applied aerially at ULV.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.  61:1000-3.
Range Caterpillar

     The range caterpillar, Hemileuca oliwiae Cockerell, feeds primarily
on range grasses in areas in northeastern and south central New Mexico
at elevations between 1734 and 2438 meters (4,700 and 8,000 feet).  The
infestation has extended into southeastern Colorado and the western edge
of the Texas Panhandle.  Range caterpillars consume large amounts of foli-
age, waste additional unconsumed parts of leaves and cause other foliage
to be ungrazed because of the presence of irritating spines on the active
larvae and cast skins (Hewitt et al.  1974).   Heavy populations may de-
stroy all grass down to the crown, producing conditions conducive to wind
and water erosion.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—Species composition of the vegetation
and  the terrain are usually dictated by the location of economic infesta-
tions of the pest.  Care should be given to uniformity of vegetation and
terrain among treatments.  Proximity to watering sites will affect forage
utilization and distribution of livestock.
     Experimental Design:—Since migration is limited in the early instars,
plot size can be considerably smaller than is required when the cater-
pillars are large.  Migration by large caterpillars is increased as the
density of the population and percentage of standing crop foliage consumed
increases.

     For small worms, plots should be at least three swaths wide by 402.2
meters  (k mile) in length.  For larger worms, the plot width should be at
least doubled.  To reduce drift, plots should be separated by an adequate
distance which will depend on wind velocity and direction.

     Plots as small as 2.43 hectares (6 acres) have been used for efficacy
tests by airplane against first and second instars.

     Watts et al. (unpublished data) has experimented with circular arenas
encompassing approximately 4.18 m2  (5 yd2) to confine known numbers of
small caterpillars within the test plots on an experimental basis to re-
duce variation in density.  These arenas were made of six inch strips of
tin forced ca 2.54 cm (1 in.) into the soil.  Larger plots, from 20.25 to
259.2 hectares (50 to 640 acres) have been used on other studies in New

-------
                                   -53-
Mexico.  Coppeck  (unpublished data) conducted preliminary screening tests
with a compressed air hand sprayer on small plots.
     Application and Equipment:—Aerial application equipment that is de-
signed for the aircraft being used should be properly calibrated.  Aircraft
designation; boom size and length; number, size of nozzle, or atomizers and
position on aircraft; pressure; aircraft speed; altitude and swath width;
type of solvent; concentration of solution and quantity of solution used
should be reported.  Dye cards for evaluation of deposit uniformity are
recommended.  Flight runs made crosswind usually increase the uniformity
of deposits.  Applications should be made under conditions that avoid ex-
cessive convection currents.
     Sampling:—Population densities are usually evaluated by counting the
number of caterpillars in square yard sampling areas located well within
the plot.  Various sampling schemes, designed to remove bias and assure
coverage of an adequate area, have been used.  The sampling scheme used
should assure that an entire swath width and preferably more be included
in the area to be sampled.  A minimum of 10.84 m^ (1-yd^) samples or more,
until at least 50 worms are counted, is needed per plot.  Additional sam-
ples will increase precision.  When 5, 4.18 m2 (5 yd^) arenas are used,
100 caterpillars per arena should be used.

     Because of the habits of the range caterpillar, the accuracy of
visual counts is increased by delaying initiation of counting until mid-
morning when ground temperatures have increased enough to initiate activity
in the caterpillars.

     Counts should be taken immediately prior to treatment and at intervals
estimated to embrace partial and maximum kill.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Where possible, treatment means
should be compared using a valid statistical test for significance.  The
standard material used in private-state-federal control programs in the geo-
graphic area should be included.  Replicated untreated plots are also re-
commended .

     The following data should be reported:

     Description of terrain and dominant vegetation, including plant
height, stage and condition at time of treatment.

     Insecticide formulation used, kilograms active toxicant/hectare and
liters/hectare of spray.

     Describe equipment in detail  (type of aircraft or application equip-
ment, speed, height,  swath width,  type, number and arrangement of nozzles
or other apparatus, etc.).

     Ground  surface temperature, air  temperature at 1.62 m  (4 ft.), wind
velocity and general  weather conditions including rainfall  amounts and

-------
                                  -54-
interval after treatment.

     Range caterpillar populations, including composition by instars, immediate-
ly prior to treatment and at intervals to measure partial and maximum population
reduction.

     Plant response, phytotoxicity and other observations.
                                References

Hewitt, G. B., E.  W.  Huddleston, Robert J.  Lavigne,  D.  N.  Veckert, and
     J. G. Watts.   1974.   Rangeland Entomology.   Range Soi. Ser.  2,
     127 pp.

Watts, J. G.  1975.  Professor of Entomology,  Department of Botany and
     Entomology, New Mexico State University.   Personal communication.
Harvester Ants

     Harvester ants of the genus Pogonomyrmex denude areas around their
nests.  When colonies are vigorous and numerous,  control efforts may be
initiated.
     Crop Variety and Location of Tests:—Areas chosen should be repre-
sentative of the region for which control recommendations are needed.
Accurate ant species determination is necessary because of the variation
in the habits of harvester ants.  Lavigne (1966), in southeast Wyoming
found that equally effective control, at least with mirex could be ob-
tained by treating any time between the end of May and the end of August,
which is during the season when ants are actively foraging.  Knowlton
(personal communication) feels that more effective control is obtained
by treating in the spring in Utah.  Lavigne (personal communication) re-
commends that baits be applied in the morning since harvester ants are
often inactive during midday.  He further states that baits applied in the
evening are subject to small mammal feeding, especially ground squirrel.
     Experimental Design:—Preliminary screening has most often been ac-
complished by individual mound treatment with baits, dusts or EC formula-
tion mixed with water.  Because of the variation in colony vigor, size
and foraging, large numbers of replicates are needed.  Untreated control
nests should be located at an adequate distance to prevent foraging from
a treated area.  Complete overlap in foraging between adjacent nests has
been shown to occur when Pogonomyrmex owy'heei- mound density was high
(Willard and Crowell 1965).

     Race (1966) used 40.5 hectare (100 acre) plots separated by untreated
buffer zones of 152.4 meters (500 ft.) for aerial application of baits.
Plots of 40.5 hectares (100 acres) have also been used by Lavigne

-------
                                   -55-
(unpublished data).  Smaller plots could obviously be used for aerial ap-
plication of baits or sprays.

     Replicated, untreated check plots should be included in the experi-
mental design.
     Application Equipment;—Simple measuring devices are used for indi-
vidual mound treatment.  For larger plots, hand spreading or an electric
powered cyclone seeder mounted on a vehicle have been used (Crowell 1963).
Bait dispersal by aircraft requires equipment designed, evaluated and
calibrated for the type of aircraft used.  Race  (1965) treated large plots
with a Stearman 650 HP aircraft equipped with a "Swathmaster" to spread
the bait.  Lavigne (unpublished data) used a Super Cub (PA-18A) equipped
with a similar metered spreader made by Avery Aviation, Inc.
     Sampling:—Control evaluations should be made in the spring of the
year following application.  Lavigne  (1966) excavated every mound in indi-
vidually treated mound tests.  Race (1965) excavated 50 mounds in each
40.5 hectare  (100 acre) plot and used an index of control to improve pre-
cision in evaluation of efficacy.  Lavigne (unpublished data) excavated
100 mounds in the same size plots.  He also evaluated the degree of rein-
festation.  Mound abandonment with or without subsequent invasion of treat-
ed mounds is possible  (Crowell 1963, Lavigne 1966).  Another factor to be
considered is that there is a single queen in harvester ant colonies and
no queen replacement is apparently possible.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Treatment means should be compared
using a valid statistical test for significance.

     The following data should be reported:

     Insecticide formulation; diluent and dilution, and amount of active
toxicant and total mix per nest or hectare.

     For baits, include name of bait, source and composition.

     Plot size, layout, mound density and size or vigor, and species of
harvester ant involved.

     Percent control on the basis of dead colonies or an index by degree
of control.
                                References

Crowell, H. H.  1963.  Control of the western harvester ant,, Pogonomyrmex
     occidental-is with poisoned baits.  J. Econ. Entomol.  56:295-8.

Knowlton, G. F.  1975.  Professor of Entomology, Emeritus, Department of
     Biology, Utah State University.  Personal  communication.

-------
                                   -56-
Lavigne, R. J.  1966.  Individual mound treatments for control of the
     western harvester ant, Pogonomyrmex occidentalis in Wyoming.  J,
     Econ.  Entomol.   59:525-32.

Lavigne, R. J,  1975.  Professor of Entomology, Entomology Section,
     Division of Plant Sciences, University of Wyoming.  Personal com-
     munication.

Lavigne, R. J., and H. G. Fisser.   1966.  Controlling Western Harvester
     Ants.  Mountain States Regional Publication 3, 4 p.

Race, S. R.  1964.  Individual colony control of the western harvester
     ant, Pogonomyrmex occidentalis.  J. Econ. Entomol.  57:860-4.

Willard, J. R,, and H. H. Crowell.  1965.  Biological activities of the
     harvester ant, Pogonomyrmex owyheei in central Oregon.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  58:484-89.
 Imported Fire Ant


     Crop Variety and Location of Tests:—Experiments should be conducted
 on heavily infested areas typical of the area for which control recommenda-
 tions are to be made.
     Experimental Design:—At least two replicates with several subplots
 per replicate are desirable.  Untreated and/or a standard insecticide
 treatment should be used.

     Minimum plot size for ground application is determined by migration
 from untreated areas, crossfeeding, or from plots where poor control is ob-
 tained.  Markin and Hill (1971) used  .405 hectare (one acre) plots isolated
 with 15.2 meter (50 ft.) wide chemically treated borders to prevent migra-
 tion; however, this did not prevent new queens from flying into the area
 after treatment and establishing new  colonies.  Lofgren et al.  (1963) and
 in personal communication recommended 2.43 to 3.24 hectare (6 to 8 acre)
 plots with 3,  .405 hectare  (one acre) sampling subplots within  the large
 plots.  For aerial plots, Markin and  Hill (1971) used 8.1 hectare  (20
 acre) plots with 10 randomly chosen  .08 hectare (1/5 acre) circular sub-
 plots for counting.
     Application and Equipment:—Hand operated Cyclone seeders, power-take-
 off model  Cyclone  seeders, Gandy fertilizer distributors and  a Buffalo
 turbine blower have been used to distribute dry materials.  Slurry  type
 baits  have been applied by a specially designed applicator which pumped
 bait out each end  of a 4.05 meter  (10 ft.) boom and dropped the slurry
 directly to  the ground in strips 4.05 meters  (10 ft.) apart (Lofgren  et
 al. 1961,  Lofgren et al. 1963).  Microencapsulated oil baits have  been
 applied with a specially designed spreader  (Markin et al. 1969).  This
 apparatus  was enlarged and adapted for aircraft application (Markin and

-------
                                   -57-
Hill 1971).  Banks et al.  (1972) used aircraft equipped with the Texas
A&M type spreader and a special spreader from the Aircraft Operations
Section, Plant Protection Division, ARS-USDA.
     Sampling: "--Control is usually determined by the percent reduction in
active mounds based on a pretreatment count of all active mounds in one
acre plots or .08 to  .405 hectare (1/5 to 1 acre) subplots within larger
areas.  Lofgren et al. (1963) considered mounds active if more than 20
workers or a wingless queen and less than 20 workers were found.  Banks
et al. (1972) opened mounds with a shovel.  Markin and Hill took pretreat-
ment counts, mapped all mounds and sampled at 10 and 22 weeks.  Other
workers have increased sampling intensity beginning as early as 2 weeks
and continuing for up to 26 weeks.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Where possible, treatment means
should be compared using a valid statistical test for significance.

     The following data should be reported:

     Description of terrain and dominant vegetation including plant
height, density, stage and condition at time of treatment.

     Insecticide formulation  used, amount of active toxicant per
hectare, name,  source, and composition of baits.

     General weather  conditions at time of application and rainfall during
evaluation.

     Mound density and percent reduction in active mounds at intervals
after application.


                                EefeTences

Banks, W. A., G. P- Markin, J. W. Summerlin, and C. S. Lofgren.  1972.
     Four Mirex bait  formulations for control of red imported fire ant.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  65:1468-70.

Lofgren, C. S., V. E. Adler, and W. F. Barthel.  1961.  Effect of some
     variations in forumlation or application procedure on control of the
     imported fire ant with granular heptachlor.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     54:45-47.

Lofgren, C. S., F. J. Bartlett, and C. E.  Stringer.  1963.  Imported
     fire ant topic bait studies:  Evaluation of carriers for oil baits.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  56:62-66.

Markin, G. P.,  C. J.  Mauffray, and D. J. Adams.  1969.  A Granular Appli-
     cator for  Very Low-volumes of Microencapsulated Insect Bait or Other
     Materials.  U. S. Dept. Agr. ARS  (Ser.) 81-84. 4 p.

Markin, G. P.,  and S. 0. Hill.  1971.  Microencapsulated oil bait  for
     control of the imported fire ant.  J. Econ. Entomol. 64:193-196.

-------
                                   -58-
-Black Grass Bugs - Ldbops and Irbisia

     Grass bugs have been recognized recently as major pests of range grasses,
especially introduced species, in restricted areas of most of the western
states.  Early symptoms of damage are yellow or whitish irregular spots on
the leaves which, with continued feeding, become more numerous, coalesce,
and the leaves dry out and die.


     Crop Variety and Location of Tests: — Areas chosen should be represen-
tative of the region for which control recommendations are needed.  Experi-
ments should be conducted on moderately to heavily infested range on which
the previous grazing history is known.


     Experimental Design: — Since migration appears to be less than with
grasshoppers, plot size can be smaller.  Plots of 12.2 x 12.2 meters (40 x
40 ft.), as recommended for plant bugs on alfalfa, should be adequate for
ground application.  Kamm (personal communication) found 6.1 x 6.1 meters
(20 x 20 ft.) plots to be adequate; however, Haws (personal communication)
experienced difficulty with drift using 9.1 x 9.1 meters (30 x 30 ft.)
plots.  A randomized complete block design with a minimum of three repli-
cates is recommended.  Care should be exercised that drift does not affect
other treatments or the untreated check.  The use of treated borders around
plots will reduce migration where this is a problem.

     The minimum size for aerial application plots will be dictated by the
type of equipment used.  The distance between plots or the width of plots
should be adequate to prevent drift as grass bug populations appear to be
very susceptible (Haws, personal communication).


     Application and Equipment : — Low pressure low-volume boom type sprayers
can be used where terrain permits.  Preliminary screening tests may be
conducted with knapsack or compressed air sprayers as long as coverage is
thorough.  For aerial application, properly calibrated application equip-
ment designed and evaluated on the type of aircraft being used is recom-
mended.  ULV formulations are usually the most suitable for aerial appli-
cation.
     Sampling: — No -standardized one-step sampling technique has been de-
veloped which is effective for all instars.  The standard 3.8 decimeter
(15 inch) insect net has been used for sampling adults and larger instars.
Sweep net samples vary in efficiency depending upon the growth habits of
the grass species being sampled.   Temperature, time of day, cloud cover,
and other variables have a profound effect on the sampling under similar
conditions.  Haws (personal communication) reports that disturbance of
the grass during sampling causes  grass bugs to drop from the plants. Todd
and Kamm (1974) and Haws (personal communication) have used modifications
of a sampling cylinder from which specimens were aspirated and in some
cases the vegetation was also placed in Berlese funnels for further speci-
men recovery.

-------
                                  -59-
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:— Treatment means should be compared
using a valid statistical test For significance.

     The following data should be reported:

     Description of terrain and dominant vegetation, including plant
height, stage and condition at time of treatment.

     Insecticide formulation used and amount of active toxicant per hectare.

     Amount of spray per hectare, type of equipment and operating parameters.

     Temperature and general weather conditions at time of treatment.

     Rainfall amounts and interval from application, especially for first
24 hours.

     Insect population counts recorded as number of insect per sweep or unit
of measurement in the vacuum net technique.  The dominant species or species
composition of the grass bug population.


                            References

Haws, B. A.  1975.  Professor of Entomology, Department of Biology, Utah State
     University.  Personal communication.

Haws, B. A., D. D. Dwyer, and M. G. Anderson.  1973.  Problems with range
     grasses:  Look for black grass bugs.  Utah Sai.   Vol. 34 March.

Kamm, J. A.  1975.  Research Entomologist, USDA, ARS, Department of Entomology,
     Oregon State University.  Personal communication.

Knowlton, G.F.   1966.  Grass Bugs:  Range and Crop Pest in Utah.  Utah State
     Univ. Ext. Serv. Entomol. Mimeo Ser. 119.

Knowlton, G. F.  1975.  Professor of Entomology, Emeritus, Department of
     Biology, Utah State University.  Personal communication.

Todd, J. G., and J. A. Kamm.  1974.  Biology and impact of a grass bug
     Labops hesperius Uhler in Oregon rangeland.  J. Range Manage.  27: 453-458,
Chigger, fleoschongastio Americana (Hirst) (Affectjpp Turkeys)

      Kung et al. (1969) described the damage of this pest by stating, "The
chigger, Neosohongastia americana (Hirst) attacks turkeys in range pens in many
areas of the southern United States.  Since the larva feeds at the site of
attachment, the area becomes inflamed and forms a purulent lesion.  The lesion
causes a skin blemish which must be removed when the turkey is processed.  The
necessary trimming causes the turkey carcus to be downgraded."

-------
                                  -60-
     Crop Variety and Location of Tes^ts_^—Since heaviest populations  are
found on soils that tend to crack when dry and on soils with rock outcroppings,
these soil types should be selected.  Sandy soils may not support adequate
populations for evaluation of insecticide efficacy (Price and Kunz 1970).

     Experimental Design:—Chigger populations as determined by the number  of
lesions per turkey are highly variable.  At least three and preferably more
replicates are needed.  Because of the habits of turkeys resting along the
edges of pens, 4.6 to 6.1 meters (15 to 20 ft.), treated borders are  necessary
around the pens containing turkeys on the experimental plots.

     Price and co-workers used wire pens of .0035 to .0034 hectare (1/116 to 1/120
acre) to confine 8 to 12-week old turkeys on treated areas.  The plots were
cleared of vegetation prior to treatment.  Treated barriers of 4.6 to 6.1
meters (15 to 20 ft.) were found to be required to achieve maximum control.
In other studies, .02 hectare (1/20 acre) pens stocked 10 turkeys, 22.8 x 22.8
meter (75 x 75 ft.) plots with pens 13.7 x 13.7 meters (45 x 45 ft.)  stocked
with 50 turkeys and .405 hectare (one acre) plots with nine 4.3 x 4.3 meter
(14 x 14 ft.) pens stocked with three turkeys each and placed in an X configura-
tion within the plot, were used (Price and Kunz 1970, Price et al. 1970).

     Replicated untreated check plots should be included in the experimental
design.  Experiments may need to be designed to evaluate serial treatments
on the same plot.

     Application Equipment:—Small plots have been treated with water sprinkling
cans for liquids, fabricated shakers for granules and commercially made portable
hand dusters.  Larger plots have been treated with pressure spravers  at 8.8-
10.6 kg/cm2 (125-150 psi) at the rate of 3741.6 liters/ha (400 gal. of water/
acre).  (Price and Kunz 1970, Price et al. 1970).

     Sampling:—Indirect counts, based on the number of chigger lesions per bird
were used in the studies cited above.

     The number of lesions on the drumsticks, thighs and breast areas were
counted for each bird.  Counts were made weekly for 7 to 20 weeks.  Price et al.
(1970) did not make weekly counts;  instead, grade as determined by a  Federal
meat inspector was used as the criterion of success or failure of the
insecticide.

     Analysis and Reporting of Dataj-r-Treatment means should be compared using
a valid statistical test for significance,

     The following data should be reported:

     Insecticide formulation used and amount of active toxicant per hectare.

      Amount  of spray, dust or granules per hectare and the type of equipment
used.

     Plot  size and lay out,  including any special vegetation clearing and
number and age of turkeys stocked.

-------
                                  -61-
     Temperature and general weather conditions at the time of treatment.

     Rainfall amounts and intervals after treatment.

     Number of lesions per bird or other index of infestation in treated
and untreated plots at each sampling interval.


                              References

Kunz, S. E., M. A. Price, and 0. H. Graham.   1969.  Biology and economic
     importance of the chigger, Neoschongastia americana on turkeys.  J.
     Econ. Entomol.  67-872-875.

Price, M.A.  1975.  Professor of Entomology,  Department of Entomology, Texas
     A&M University.  Personal communication.

Price, M.A., and S. E. Kunz.  1970.  Insecticidal screening for chemicals to
     control the chigger, Neoschongastia ameri-cana  (Hirst) on turkeys.  J-
     Econ. Entomol.  63:373-6.
Price, M.A.,  S.E. Kunz,  and  Jesse  J. Matter.   1970.  Use  of Dursban  to control
     Neoschongast-ia ccreT-ioana,  a turkey  chipger „  ir  experimental pens.  J'.
     Econ. Entomol.   6°-377-379.

-------
                                    -62-
                       VEGETABLES (FIELD GROWN)
                              CRUCIFERAE
     Crops in this group include:  Cabbage - Brassica oleracea var. capitata:
Broccoli - Brassica oleracea var. botrytis- Cauliflower - Brassica oleracea
var. botrytis; Brussels sprouts - Brassica oleracea var. germifera; Kale  -
Brass-Lea oleracea var. ocephala; Collards - Brassica oleracea var. virdis:
Turnip - Brassica campestris var. rapa; Mustard - Brassica juncea var.
crispifolia; Spinach - Spinacia oleracea.
Cabbage Looper  (//I) Trichoplusia ni (Hubner) and Associated Insects

     The cabbage looper, Trichoplusia ni (Hubner), is without question the
number one pest of this group.  During the 1950's and much of the 1960's,
growers of these crops  in many sections of the country were without adequate
looper insecticides.  Residue problems, precluding the release of new chemicals
and removal of  some previously labeled, the development of resistance and
higher consumer standards—all contributed to an almost untenable situation.
With the appearance of  improved strains of the safe bacterium, Bacillus
thuringiensis Berliner, and approval of new insecticides such as methomyl
and methamidophos there is now hope of eventual success in looper control.  In
addition, the use of viruses, sex attractants, chemosterilants and other
physiological and biological methods show great promise for the future.
However, constant investigations for improved measures against loopers are
necessary and will continue to be one of the most active areas in insect
control.

     Although test procedures for cabbage loopers will be stressed, there are
a number of other insects that may be sampled and recorded using the same basic
test structures.  "Some of these associated pests are as follows:  Imported
cabbage worm, Pieris rapae (Linnaeus): diamondback, Plutella xylostella
(Linnaeus): fall armyworm, Spodoptera frugiperda (J.E. Smith): beet armyworm,
Spodoptera exigua (Hubner): Garden webworm, Loxostege rantalis (Guenee),
Hawaiian beet webworm, Hymenia recurvalis (Fabricius), and corn earworm,
Heliothis zea (Boddie).

     Both foliage sprays and systemic granulars applied to the soil will be
covered.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a variety or varieties commonly
grown in the area in question.  A uniform test is desirable since the degree
of control or plant response may vary in different soil types.  Follow proven
planting techniques and cultural practices.

-------
                                  -63-
     Experimental Design:—

     Ground Application-A randomized complete block design with three or more
replications per treatment is suggested.  Ideally, candidate insecticide
performance should be compared with untreated plots and one or more standard
insecticides recommended for the area in question.  However, if it is impossible
to have untreated controls, it should be sufficient to compare the treatments
with one or more of the recommended standards.

     Plot size may vary greatly depending on the uniformity of infestation
and population density.  A number of investigators have used single row
7.6-15.2 m (25-50 ft.) long plots with success: Boling (1972), Chalfant and
Brett (1965), Chalfant et al. (1973), Creighton et al. (1971, 1974) and
Shorey (1963).  Kouskolekas and Harper (1973) utilized 9.1-12.2 (30-40 ft.)
long plots with 4-5 rows.  Davis and Kuhr (1974), Greene and Workman (1971),
and Judge and McEwen  (1970) made observations on multiple row 15.2 m (50 ft.)
long plots.

     One or more adjacent untreated rows would appear to be essential to 1
and 2 row plots and highly desirable in larger test areas.  Davis and Kuhr
(1974) planted 2 rows of corn next to their 2 row plots.  Hofmaster and
Waterfield (unpublished data at the Virginia Truck and Ornamentals Research
Station, Painter, Virginia) worked with 1-3 row plots 10.7-15.2 m (35-50 ft.)
long which were bounded by 1-3 untreated rows, thereby affording increased
insect pressure and minimizing cross contamination.

     Aerial Application-A minimum of 2 and preferably 3 swaths, each 12.2 m
(40 ft.) wide or covering a comparable area is suggested to prevent drift and
have sufficient area  in the middle of the plot to collect representative
samples.  The length  should be sufficient to enable the pilot to fly level
and safely over the plots for at least 182.6 m (600 ft.).


     Application and  Equipment:—Both sprays and granular applications should
be utilized in investigating insect control and can be adapted to most of the
species concerned.
                                                                    2
     Ground Application-Knapsack sprayers operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm  (30-60
psi) and delivering 187.1-935.4 liters/ha (20-100 gallons of water/acre) will
give satisfactory results (Shorey 1963, Creighton et al. 1971).  Calibrate
the sprayers carefully and apply the spray along each side of the row and
over the top.  Where  single nozzles are used this will require a trip along
each side and back over the top.  Backpack sprayers may have a spray boom
equipped with 3 nozzles per row.  These nozzles should be adjusted so as to
cover the top 'and sides of each row (Fofmaster and Waterfield 1972).

     In moving to mechanized equipment, a wide variety of pressures and rates
are encountered, e.g., Judge and McEwen (1970) 261.9 liters/ha (28 gallons/
acre) at 4.2 kg/cm2 (60 psi): Greene and Workman (1971) 935.4 liters/ha at
17.6 kg/cm2 (250 psi): and Kouskolekas and Harper (1973) 935.4 liters/ha
(100 gallons/acre at  38.7 kg/cm2 (550 psi)).  Generally speaking, the type of
application equipment is of secondary  importance if good coverage is obtained.

-------
                                  -64-
     When working with large plots it is suggested that the treatments be
applied with equipment that is adaptable to that particular locality.  Such
procedure will do much to decrease the danger of subsequent failure should
a product be labeled for a given method that is not generally followed
or cannot be followed in a particular section.

     Granules may be applied by a variety of methods.  One of the most
commonly used is as a soil sidedress, either at planting, transplanting, or
later in the season.  Commercial applicators may be used satisfactorily.
Calibrate the applicator carefully for each formulation and then treat
directly without resetting.  Hale and Shorey (1972) applied granules with a
tractor-mounted belt planter by side-dressing 7.6-10.2 cm (3-4 in.) from the
plant row and 5.1-7.6 cm (2-3 in.) deep.  Plants were 7.6-15.2 cm  (3-6 in.)
high at the time of planting and irrigation was applied within 24 hours.

     Aerial Application-Use nozzle arrangement and volume of finished spray
determined to be practical under existing conditions.  In most areas the spray
volume will range from 18.7-93.5 liters/ha (2-10 gallons/acre) although good
control has been obtained with lower or higher dosages.

     Regardless of the method of application, the equipment should be
thoroughly cleaned before each use.  When changing treatments, the tank, boom
and nozzles should be rinsed with water run through the entire system until it
is clear.

     If more than one rate (kg/ha or Ibs/acre) of toxicant is used, start the
test seciuences with the lowest rate thereby keeping the chances of contamination
at a minimum.  Generally, several rates should be applied when testing is in
the initial phase.  After the rate or rate range is established and testing
is in the final stages, emphasis should be placed on the probable rate or rates
to be used.
     Sampling:—Make direct counts of larvae, checking at least 10-25 plants or
parts therefrom/plot (Creighton et al. 1971, 1974, Chalfant and Brett 1965,
Chalfant et al. 1973, Greene and Workman 1971).   A clearer understanding will
be obtained if the surviving loopers are grouped according to size.  Hale' and
Shorey  (1972) recorded the loopers as:  small (1st stage): medium   (2nd to
early 4th); and large (late 4th and 5th stages) .

     Be prepared to supplement direct counts with ratings of injury.  This
can be especially important when a naturally occurring nuclear polyhedrosis
virus decimates the existing population in a space of 4-5 days (Hofmaster 1961).

     Various ratings may be employed:  Kouskolekas and Harper (1973) adopted
a 1 to 10 scale; Greene et al. (1969) working on a cooperative cabbage looper
control program in Florida used a damage rating scale of 1 to 6; Greene and
Workman (1971) adapted this 1 to 6 rating on a leaf crop (collards) • Creighton
and McFadden  (1974) examined the edible leaves of each plant (collards) , record-
ed the number of injured and uninjured leaves, and used these to calculate
the percentage of plants that were either uninjured or had 1 leaf, 2-10 leaves
or more than 10 leaves injured; and Ratcliffe et al. (1961) adapted a weighted
injury index in which values were assigned to various classes of injury,
multiplied by the number of plants in that class and divided by the total
number of plants checked.  Whatever the rating method,  be explicit.  Do not
use terminology such as medium, severe, etc. without clearly spelling out

-------
                                  -65-
just what these terms encompass.

     Take yield records, carefully noting the extent of injury to the marketable
parts of the plant at harvest.  Records may be taken from the entire plot or
representative section therefrom.  Separate crop into marketable and unmarketable
classification similar to the method of Reid (1940) for cabbage:  Class 1 -
head and 4 wrapper leaves free of all feeding; Class 2 - plants with some
caterpillar injury but eligible to U.S. Grade 1: and Class 3 - head and 4
wrapper leaves extensively damaged by feeding and ineligible to U.S. Grade 1.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Compare treatment means using a valid
statistical method such as Duncan's multiple range test.  Candidate insecticide
performance should be compared with replicated untreated plots and one or more
standard insecticides recommended for the area.  Where it is impossible to
leave untreated areas, comparison with one or more standard insecticides should
suffice.

     The following data should be reported:

     1.  Pre-test counts to determine approximate level of the population prior
to treatment.  It is realized that this will not be possible for some types of
insects.
     2.  Insecticide formulation used and kilograms active toxicant/hectare
(Ibs active/acre).  Describe application equipment, quantity delivered, pressure,
etc.
     3.  Insect populations and stage of plant growth on given date, listing
sampling technique.
     4.  Plant height, stage and condition at time of treatment and sampling.
     5.  Temperature, humidity, rainfall and general weather conditions at
treatment.  Record these for all application dates and all except humidity for
the sampling dates.  Overall weather records for the entire test period may be
useful.
     6.  Percent organic matter and type of soil.
     7-  Plant response, phytotoxicity or obvious defects in the harvested crop.
Harlequin Bug  (Murgantia histrionica)  (Hahn)

     The harlequin or "fire bug," Murgantia histrionica (Hahn), has been called
the most important insect enemy of cabbage, collards and related crops in the
southern half  of the U.S.  It sucks the sap from the plants, injecting toxic
saliva and apparently poisoning them as it does so, as damage is far out of
proportion to  the number of bugs or juices withdrawn.  Damage first appears as
chlorotic spots but these areas soon turn brown and die.  Severely injured
plants wither  and appear as if scalded.  Published references concerning
harlequin control are quite limited.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of both adults and nymphs on 10-25 plants/
plot, keeping  the two classes separate.  Where populations are low, 50 or more
nymphs may be  carefully counted on the plants, the section of the row can be
isolated and the treatments applied (Hofmaster 1959) for determining mortality.

-------
                                  -66-
     Supplement with observations on the number of characteristic keg-shaped
egg masses.

     Record plant condition throughout the season; either through ratings
or actual counts of the harlequin bugs or their feeding scars.

     Collect yield records.  Record marketable and unmarketable heads or
leaves and their weights.  Yields may be from the entire plot or representative
sections therefrom.
Flea Beetles

     A number of species of flea beetles attack crops of this group.  The striped
cabbage flea beetle, Phyllotreta striolata (Fabricius)r  the western striped
flea beetle, Phyllotreta rcanosa (Crotch); the western black flea beetle,
Phyllotreta pusilla (Horn); the sinuate striped flea beetle, Phyllotreta
sinuata (Stephens): and the spinach flea beetle, Disonycha xanfhomelas
(Dalman) are some of these.

     Flea beetles vary greatly in life history and while the larvae of most
species develop in the soil, some of the young feed on or in the foliage.
Examples of foliage feeding larvae include the sinuate striped flea beetle
and spinach flea beetle.  Although the flea beetle larvae cause damage, most of
the injury is by the adults.  Seedling plants of this group are especially
vulnerable to damage by flea beetles and plant stands may be seriously reduced
in a day or so.


     Sampling:—Select at least 25 leaves/plot and count the flea beetle feeding
scars thereon.   If damage is heavy, count uniform sections of the leaf.  Some
investigators such as Ratcliffe et al. (1961) prefer to count all the beetles on
a plant but this is difficult unless a sampling cage (Hills 1933) is used.
Make larval counts of species that develop on the foliage.  Sweeping is discouraged
as an accurate means of evaluation.

     On seedlings, count the number of injured plants/0.305 m (1 ft.) of row.
Stand counts may be needed where infestations are severe.  If the plants have
several leaflets it may be possible to check 100 or more leaflets/plot.  On calm
days, actual counts of beetles/10-25 samples of 0.305 m (1 ft.) of row may be
advantageous.  A sampling cage (Hills 1933) may be used to advantage.

     Take yields, using methods that are most appropriate for the crop.  Yields
may be from the entire plot or representative areas therefrom.


                             References

Boling, J.C.  1972.  Insecticidal control of the cabbage looper in small field
     plots.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.   65(6):1737-1738.

-------
                                   -67-


Chalfant, R.B., and C.H. Brett.  1965.  Cabbage looper and imported cabbage-
     worms:  feeding damage and control on cabbage in western North Carolina.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  58(l):28-33.

Chalfant, R.B., W.G. Genung, and R.B. Workman.  1973.  Control of the cabbage
     looper in Florida and Georgia.  J. Econ. Entomol.  66(1) -.276-277.

Creighton, C.S., and T.L. McFadden.  1974.  Complimentary actions of low rates
     of Bacillus thuringiensis and chlordimeform hydrochloride for control of
     caterpillars on cole crops.  J. Econ. Entomol.  67(1):102-104.

Creighton, C.S., T.L. McFadden, and R.B. Cuthbert.  1971.  Control of the
     cabbage looper, Trichoplusia ni, and of two associated caterpillar species
     on cabbage with Bacillus thuringiensis and chemical insecticides.   J.  Ga.
     Entomol. Soc.  8(2):132-136.

Creighton, C.S., T.L. McFadden, and R.B. Cuthbert.  1974.  Chemical Insecticides:
     Field Evaluation for Control of Cabbage Caterpillars.  ARS-S-32, March 1974,
     6 pages.

Davis, A.C., and R.J. Ruhr.  1974.  Laboratory and field evaluation of methomyl's
     toxicity to the cabbage looper.  J. Econ. Entomol.  67(5):681-682.

Greene, G.L., W.G. Genung, R.B. Workman, and E.G. Kelsheimei*.  1969.  Cabbage
     looper control in Florida - A cooperative program.  J.  Econ. Entomol.
     62(4):798-800.

Greene, G.L., and R.B. Workman.  1971.  Cabbage looper control on collards in
     Florida.  J. Econ. Entomol.  64(5):1331-1332.

Hale, R.L., and H.H. Shorey.  1972.  Cabbage looper control on cole crops in
     southern California:  Granular insecticides in the soil indicate lack of
     promise.  J. Econ. Entomol.  65(6):1658-1661.

Hills, Orin A.  A new method for collecting samples of insect populations.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  26(4) :906-910.

Hofmaster, R.N.  1959.  Effectiveness of new insecticides against the Harlequin
     cabbage bug on collards.  J. Econ. Entomol.  52(4) -.777-778.

Hofmaster, R.N.  1961.  Seasonal abundance of the cabbage looper as related to
     light trap collections, precipitation, temperature and the incidence of a
     nuclear polyhedrosis virus.  J. Econ. Entomol.  54(4):796-798.

Hofmaster, R.N., and R.L. Waterfield.  1972.  Insecticide control of the potato
     tuberworm in late crop potato foliage.  Am. Potato J.  49:383-390.

Judge, F.D., and F.L. McEwen.  1970.  Field testing candidate insecticides on
     cole crops for control of cabbage looper and imported cabbageworm in New
     York State.  J. Econ. Entomol.  63(3) :862-866.

Kouskolekas, Costas A., and James D. Harper.  1973.  Control of insect
     defoliators of collards in Alabama.  J. Econ. Entomol.   66(5):1159-1161.

-------
                                  -68-
Ratcliff, R.H., L.P. Ditman, and T.J. Whitlaw, Jr.  1961.  Field experiments on
     insecticidal control of insect pests of cabbage and broccoli.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.   54(2)=356-359.

Shorey, H.H.  1963.  Field experiments on insecticidal control of lepidopterous
     larvae on cabbage and cauliflower.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  56(6):877-880.
                     CRUCIFERAE AND HEAD LETTUCE
Aphids and Thrips


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a crop variety that is grown
commercially in a suitable test area that is protected from pesticide drift
from any adjoining fields, i.e., having the test area upwind from the adjoining
field should be sufficient.  Aphids and thrips should be considered economical-
ly important in the test area.


     The plot size should depend on the stage of pesticide development.  In
the early stages small hand and ground equipment applications will suffice to
demonstrate efficacy.  Plots one row wide by 7.6-15.2 tn (25-50 ft.) long with
1-2 untreated buffer rows between each plot should be large enough for small
"screening" tests.

     In the final stages of pesticide development the plot size should be
larger to more closely resemble the  commercial ground and air applications,
and large enough to prevent drift from adjacent plots from influencing the
results in the sampling area.

     Since most commercial plantings of cruciferae  and lettuce are double
row beds, it is suggested that experimental pesticide plots be conducted on
double row beds as it is much more difficult to obtain coverage in comparison
to single row beds.  Most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8 beds per
swath, therefore, plots should be 12-16 beds wide by 18.3 m (60 ft.) long.

     Air plots should be 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide or 3 swaths 12.2 m  (40 ft.)
in width to  prevent drift and to have enough area in the middle of the plots
to make aphid and thrip counts over a wide area.  The length must be long
enough to enable the pilot to fly level and safely over the plots for at least
182.9 m (600 ft.).


     Experimental Design:—Use a randomized complete block design.  Use at
least three replications when applied by ground equipment.  When applied by
air, two replications will suffice when populations of aphids (apterous) and
thrips are fairly evenly distributed throughout the test area.  However, more
replications should be used whenever possible.

     Plots should be staked and mapped in any numbering system  that will
conceal as much as possible the identity of individual treatments when plot
evaluations are made.  One suggested method would be to number and stake the

-------
                                   -69-


plots in consecutive order.  (For example, 1-30.)  Then give each treatment
a letter that would correspond to two or more of the numbered plots, depending
on the number of replications.  Treatment "a" for example might be applied in
plot 3, 11, etc.


     Application and Equipment:—Untreated controls should be used to determine
the aphid and thrip severity and to provide a basis of comparison of the
treatments.  Also apply the recognized standard to provide a basis of comparison.
If it is impossible to have untreated controls because of the large acreage
involved, it should be sufficient to compare the treatments with one or more
acceptable standard materials.

     Equipment should be thoroughly cleaned before each use.  Between each
treatment the tanks, boom and nozzles should be rinsed and clean water run
through the system until the water comes out clear.  If more than one rate
(AI/A) of the same material and the same formulation are being tested, start
the test sequence with the lowest rate so that the chances of contamination
are kept at a minimum.

     A row crop boom attached to any acceptable foliar spray ground equipment
should be used for proper coverage.  There are many types of spray tips that
can be used.  It is suggested thatconejet cone spray tips (TX series) be used
when low capacity spray volume is needed.  The small particle size provides
maximum distribution of the pesticide.  When higher pressures and flow rates are
needed, then the disk cone spray tip should be used.  There are situations when
the best method is a flat fan type tip directed over the center of the plant row.
This will provide deeper penetration into the plant foliage.  The drop side
spray tips could then be the disk type.  The nozzles can be mounted on drop
pipes suspended from the boom.  Three nozzles per row is suggested when plants
are small.  As the plants grow, the number of nozzles should increase to provide
optimum coverage.  Regardless of the number of nozzles per row, the spray
pattern from the side tips should be directed in such a way as to apply as much
pesticide as possible to the underside of the leaves.  When small screening
tests are applied, knapsack sprayers operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm  (30-60 psi)
will give satisfactory results.  The boom should have 3 nozzles per row.  Air
application equipment should be commercially acceptable.

     Granules-Many methods of granule placement are possible.  It is suggested
that two methods be used.  Placing the granules directly in the furrow at
planting time, or applied as a side-dress (with fertilizer saves labor costs)
7.6-10.2 cm (3-4 in.) deep and 5.1-10.2 cm (2-3 in.) to one side of the plant
row.

     The rate of application is dependent on the stage of pesticide development.
Two to three rates (AI/A) should be used when testing is in its initial phase.
After the most efficient rate has been established and the pesticide is in the
final stages of development, then emphasis should be placed on the probable
rate or rates (AI/A) to be used.

     The finished spray volume per acre would be dependent on the size of the
lettuce plants.  When foliar spray is applied by small hand or large ground
equipment, 113.6-227.1 liters/ha (30-60 gals./acre) will give satisfactory results,
When foliar spray is applied by air, 37.9-56.8 liters/ha (10-15 gals/acre) will
provide good results.

-------
                                  -70-


     The time of application should  be when aphids and thrips first appear in
any numbers that represent fairly closely an economic infestation.

     Since the control of aphids and thrips mostly requires a remedial type
treatment or treatments,  the testing of pesticides to control aphids and thrips
is a "one application" type screening method.   The second application, if
requested, would follow when the effectiveness of the initial application is
gone.

     One to three days is suggested  as the initial interval between treatment
and observations, and then every 4-7 days thereafter until control in all plots
is no longer considered economic, unless of course specific intervals are
requested.


     Sampling:—Count the total number of apterous aphids on 5-10 plants per
plot.  The number of plants would depend on the severity of the infestation.
The small size and quick  movement of thrips prevent the use of accurate visual
leaf counts.  More than one method of counting thrips can be used, including
shaking the plants over jars containing alcohol and selecting leaves at
random and placing them in alcohol jars for counting in the laboratory.  It is
suggested that the best method would be the use of a "Burlese."  This would
involve selecting plants  or leaves at random and placing them in the burlese
where heat and light drive the thrip from the leaves down to the alcohol jars
where they can be counted at the convenience of the investigator.  This method
can also be used for aphids and gives more accuracy to the data.  When making
counts, care should be taken to keep within a well buffered zone.  When
examining small single row hand plots, keep at least 1.5 m (5 ft.) away from
the end of the plot.

     The crop on which any new pesticide is being tested should be examined at
least once to determine if there is  any deterimental effect on yield.  This is
especially important when the pesticide is applied during the early stages of
plant development.  All mature cruciferae and lettuce heads in a given area of
the central part of the plot should  be harvested.  Marketable heads should be
put in field cartons and  the data converted to "yield in cartons per hectare
(acre)."

     Any type of phytoxicity such as stunting, leaf burn and chlorosis and
the percent of damage should be reported.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Data means should be compared using any
valid statistical test for significance such as Duncan's new multiple range
at the 5% level.

     The following information should be included in reporting test results:

     Product name and formulation used.
     Crop (variety)  treated.
     Location of  the test.
     Type of irrigation used (furrow or sprinkler).
     Plot size.
     Number of replications.
     Active  ingredient kg/ha (Ib/acre).
     Finished spray  volume 1/ha (gal./acre).
     Method of application.

-------
                                   -71-
     Stage of crop growth.
     Treatment dates.
     Evaluation technique.
     Sampling technique.
     Number of samples taken.
     Total insect counts per plot.
     Phytotoxicity.
     Comments regarding unusual test conditions or performance.
     Temperature and general weather conditions at time of treatment.
     Rainfall or any unusual weather conditions following the application.
     Include comment on performance as related to commercial acceptability.
     Statistical analysis.
                             References

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports on file with the Entomology
     Department, University of California, Riverside, California.

Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

Hall, I.M., R.L. Hale, H.H. Shorey, and K.Y. Arakawa.  1961.  Evaluation of
     chemical and microbial materials for control of the cabbage looper.
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  54(1):141-146.

McCalley, N.F., and Der-I-Wang.  1972.  Field evaluation of insecticides
     for control of the green peach aphid and alfalfa looper on head lettuce,
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  65(3):794-796.

Shorey, H.H., and I.M. Hall.  1962.  Effect of chemical and microbial
     insecticides on  several insect pests of lettuce in Southern California.
     J. Eoon. Entomol.  55(2):169-174.
Cabbage Looper (#2) Trichoplusia ni (Hubner)

     Most of the following methodology will also apply to the following pests
on cruciferae and head lettuce:  imported cabbageworm, armyworms, diamond-backs,
and beet armyworms.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—See statement under Aphids and Thrips.
Only modifications are noted below.

     In the early stages of pesticide testing, small hand and ground equipment
applications would suffice to demonstrate efficacy.  Plots one row wide by
7.6 m (25 ft.) long with 1-2 untreated buffer rows between each plot should be
large enough since the cabbage looper larva is not very mobile and is very
difficult to kill.

     Since most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8 beds per swath, plots
should be 6-8 beds wide by 15.2-18.3 m (50-60 ft.) long.

-------
                                   -72-
     Even though treatments by air are not as effective as by ground applications,
they do occur and are necessary under conditions of wet fields, etc.  Test plots
by air should be 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide (3 swaths 12.2 m (40 ft.) in width) to
prevent drift, and long enough to enable the pilot to fly level and safely
over the plots for at least 182.9 m (600 ft.).


     Experimental Design:—See statement under Aphids and Thrips, substitute
"larvae" for "aphids (apterous) and thrips."


     Application and Equipment:—Only deviations from Aphids and Thrips are
noted below.

     No method of placing systemic granules in the soil for cabbage looper
control has proven to be economically satisfactory.  There are many reasons
for failure and most can be found by consulting the literature.

     The time of application should be when cabbage loopers first appear in any
numbers that represent fairly closely an economic infestation.  Preferably
the population should include small, medium and large size worms.  This
procedure will test the efficacy of the pesticide against as many stages of
the cabbage looper larvae  as possible.

     Normally, one, three  and seven days is suggested as the interval between
treatment and observations for the first 3 evaluations and then every 5-7
days until control in all  plots is no longer considered economic.  This method
will provide information on quick initial kill and the longevity effectiveness
of the pesticide.


     Sampling:—Count the  total cabbage looper larvae on at least 10 plants
per plot.  (If replicated  4 times, this would mean 40 plants per pesticide
treatment.)  Care should be taken when examining small single row hand plots
to keep at least 1.5 m (5  ft.) away from the end of each plot.  When plots
are commercial ground or air, keep within a well buffered zone.

     A better understanding of the effect of each pesticide tested will be
obtained if the surviving  cabbage looper larvae are counted according to
size:  Small (1st stage);  medium (2nd to early 4th stages); and large (late 4th
and 5th stages).

     See also the statement under Aphids and Thrips for information concerning
yield data and phytotoxicity.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Aphids and Thrips.


                             References

Boling,  J.C.   1972.   Insecticidal control of the cabbage looper in small field
     plots.   J.  Econ.  Entomol.   65(6):1737-1738.

-------
                                   -73-
Hale, R.L., and H.H. Shorey.  1972.  Cabbage looper control on cole crops in
     Southern California:  Granular insecticides in the soil indicate lack of
     promise.  J. Econ. Entomol.  65(6):1658-1661.

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual  reports  on file with the Entomology Department,
     University of California,  Riverside, California.

Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

Hall, I.M., R.L. Hale, H.H. Shorey, and K.Y. Arakawa.  1961.  Evaluation of
     chemical and microbial materials for control of the cabbage looper.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  54(1):141-146.

Shorey, H.H., and R.L. Hale.  1963.  Field experiments on insecticidal control
     of lepidopterous  larvae  on cabbage and cauliflower.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     56(6):877-880.

Shorey, H.H., and I.M. Hall.  1962.  Effect of chemical and microbial
     insecticides on several  insect pests of lettuce in Southern California.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  55(2):169-174.

Shorey, H.H., and R.L. Hale.  1965.  Cabbage looper, a principle pest of
     agricultural crops in California.  Calif. Agric.   19(3):10-11.

Shorey, H.H., and R.L. Hale.  1967.  Evaluation of systemic insecticides
     incorporated in the soil for control of lepidopterous larvae on cole
     crops in Southern California.  J. Econ. Entomol.   60(6):1567-1570.
                              CUCURBITS
     Crops in this group include:   Cantaloupe  - Cucwnis melo var.  cantalupenis:
Cucumber - Cucumis sativus; Pumpkin - Cucurbita pepo; Squash - Cucurb-ita maxima;
and Watermelon - Ci-trullus vulgaris.
Cucumber Beetles

     At least five species of cucumber beetles infest cucurbit plantings in
different areas. These  are as follows:  striped cucumber beetle, Acalymma
vittata (Fabricius) ; spotted cucumber beetle, Diabrotica undecimpunctata howardi
Barber; western spotted cucumber beetle, Viabrotica undecimpunctata undecimpunctata
Mannerheim; western striped cucumber beetle, Acalymma trivittata (Mannerheim);
and the banded cucumber beetle, Diabrotica balteata LeConte.  All have similar
habits and life cycles but, in general, the striped cucumber beetle causes more
overall injury to cucurbits by direct feeding and transmitting bacterial wilt.
Due to the wide distribution and importance of cucumber beetles, test methods
for this group will be described first; with slight modifications they can be
adapted for other cucurbit pests.

-------
                                  -74-
     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a variety or varieties of cucurbits
commonly grown in the same geographic area.  Brett and Sullivan (1970) have
demonstrated a variation in insect susceptibility among cucurbits.  If the
information is available, plant a more susceptible variety.  Follow proven
planting and cultural techniques for the area.


     Experimental Design:—

     Ground Application-A randomized complete-block design with three or more
replications is suggested.  Ideally, candidate  insecticide performance should be
compared with untreated plots and one or more standard insecticides recommended
for the area in question.  However, if it is impossible to have untreated
controls, it should be sufficient to compare the treatments with one or more
recommended insecticides.

     Plot size may vary greatly, depending on the anticipated uniformity of
infestation, stage of insect and population density.  The following references
to plot size are not limited to cucumber beetle investigations but include
other cucurbit pests.

     Gould (1969), who has conducted extensive  cucumber beetle investigations,
adapted single row 10.7 m (35 ft.) long plots in rows planted 193-203.2 cm
(76-80 in.) apart.  Waites and Habeck (1968) treated plots 7.6 m (25 ft.) long
by 4 rows wide, while Canerday (1967) selected  the same length but varied from
1-3 rows.  Roberts and Anderson (1960) used 8 row wide plots 9.1 m (30 ft.) in
length.  Staples et al.  (1967) employed plots 9.1 m (30 ft.) long by 4.6 m
(15 ft.) wide containing 12 hills with 3-5 plants/hill.  Researchers such as
Wright and Decker (1955) used large scale field length plots ranging from
4-16 rows in width.

     Aerial Application-A minimum of 2 and preferably 3 swaths each 12.2 m
(40 ft.) wide or covering a comparable area is  suggested to prevent drift and
to have sufficient area in the middle of the plot to collect representative
samples.  The length should be sufficient to enable the pilot to fly level
and safely over the plots for at least 182.6 m (600 ft.)


     Application and Equipment:—Both liquid and granular applications should
be considered in investigations of cucurbit insect control and can be adapted
to most of the species concerned.

     Ground Application-Knapsack sprayers operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm2 (30-60 psi)
and delivering 187.1-935.4 liters/ha (20-100 gallons/acre) will give
satisfactory results.   (Canerday  1967, Fisher 1965.)  Calibrate the sprayers
carefully and apply the spray along each side of the row and over the top.
Where single nozzles are used, this will require a trip along each side and
back over the top.  Backpack sprayers may have a boom equipped with 3 nozzles/
row.  Regardless of the crop involved, the nozzles should be adjusted so as to
cover upper and lower leaf surfaces  (Hofmaster and Waterfield 1972) .

     Due to the many variations possible in spraying techniques on cucurbits,
no attempt will be made to standardize, especially in field scale plots.  The
most practicable end results for large plots will be obtained by utilizing
commercial spray practices best adapted to the crop and area concerned.

-------
                                   -75-
     Regardless of the type of equipment used, repeated and early applications
are necessary for the control of cucumber beetles and subsequent reduction of
bacterial wilt.  For example, Gould  (1969) treated the following days after
plant emergence: 2, 5, 8, 12, 17 and 24.

     Aerial Application-Use nozzle arrangement and volume of finished spray
determined to be practical under existing conditions.  In most areas the spray
volume will range from 18.7-93.5 liters/ha (2-10 gallons/acre) although good
insect control has been obtained with lower or higher dosages.

     Granules may best be applied with a commercial granular applicator
although successful tests have been conducted using a simulated applicator
technique (Gould 1969).  Be sure to place granules in the same relative position
consistently and study placement in detail as much information is needed.
Calibrate the granular applicator carefully for each formulation and rate and
then treat directly without resetting.

     Note:  Bees are extremely valuable and essential as pollinators of cucurbits.
The effect of the test chemical on the bees should be determined insofar as
possible.  Harm to the bees will be reduced if treatments are made towards
evening.

     Regardless of the method of application, the equipment should be
thoroughly cleaned before each use.  When changing treatments, the tank, boom
and nozzles should be rinsed with water run through the entire system until it
is clear.

     If more than one rate (kg/ha or Ibs/acre) of toxicant is used, start
the test sequences with the lowest rate thereby keeping the chances of contamina-
tion at a minimum.  Generally, several rates should be applied when testing
is in the initial phase.  After the rate or rate range is established and
testing is in the final stages, emphasis should be placed on the probable rate
or rates to be used.
     Sampling:—Evaluations may require a wide variety of observations.

     Overwintered Beetles-These beetles work down to the germinating cucurbits
and often clip them below ground level.  In addition, they transmit bacterial
wilt and mosaic and carry the diseases from field to field.  Early season
control is most important since the bacterial wilt overwinters in the beetles
and they are infective at the first feeding.

     Make direct counts of overwintered beetles per 10-25 hills/plot.  Record
bacterial wilt and mosaic as they occur.  Gould (1969) measured the average
length of vines at thinning time and also checked the incidence of bacterial
wilt.  Staples et al.  (1967) developed a portable cage, with the counter inside,
for determining adult populations.

     Larvae-If plants appear to be in poor condition later in the season and
do not have obvious wilt, it may be from larval damage to the roots.  Examine
5-10 hills/plot.

-------
                                  -76-
     New Adults-Adults present as the fruit nears maturity often gnaw holes
in the skin or rind and otherwise scar the fruit.  Examine 10-25 fruit/plot,
taking special care to check the area in contact with the soil.

     Record number and weight of fruit for at least 3 harvests.  Records may
be taken from'the entire plot or representative section therefrom.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Compare treatment means using a valid
statistical method such as Duncan's multiple-range test.  Candidate insecticide
performance should be compared with replicated untreated plots and one or more
standard insecticides recommended for the area in question.  Where it is
impossible to leave untreated areas,  comparison with one or more standard
insecticides should suffice.

     The following data should be reported:

     1.  Pre-test counts, where feasible, to determine approximate level of
the insect population prior to treatment.  It should be pointed out that this
is not possible for some types of insect infestations.
     2.  Insecticide formulation used and kilograms active toxicant/hectare
or Ibs. active/acre.  Describe application equipment, gallonage, pressure,
etc.
     3.  Insect populations and stage of plant growth on given date, listing
sampling technique and units of measurement.
     4.  Plant height, stage and condition at time of treatment and sampling.
     5.  Temperature, humidity, rainfall and general weather conditions at
treatment.  Record these for all applications and all except humidity for the
sampling dates.  Overall weather records for the entire test period may be
useful.
     6.  Percent organic matter and type of soil.
     7.  Plant response, phytotoxicity or obvious defects in the harvested
crop.
Squash Bug, Anasa tri,st-is (De Geer)

     The squash bug, Anasa tristis De Geer,  is a very difficult insect to
control.  Leaves of attacked plants wilt rapidly, resulting from toxic
salivary secretions and appearing almost as  though they were literally
strangled or poisoned.  The margins of the leaves soon become crisp and dead
and whole plants may be killed.   Later on the fruit is attacked, especially
squash and pumpkin in the fields after frost has killed the vines.


     Sampling:—Evaluation of squash bug populations is difficult in the
adult stage early in the season.  Nymphal counts are easier to make and much
more accurate overall.  Fisher and Green (1965) successfully combined adult
and nymphal counts.

     Examine 10-25 plants/plot for evidences of adult feeding injury.  Record
degree, if possible.

     As nymphs appear, count the number per  10-25 plants/plot or, if the
populations are high, take single leaf samples.

-------
                                  -77-
     Record the number of scmash bugs around 10-25 plants/plot in the fall.
Check fruit for injury.

     Take yield of marketable and non-marketable fruit, recording number, weight,
and injured and malformed fruit.  Records may be taken from the entire plot or
representative section thereform.
Squash Vine Borer, Melittia cucurbitae  (Harris)

     Control of the squash vine borer, Melittia oucwc'bitae (Harris), must be of
a preventive nature as the borers work inside the stems and vines.  Make 4 or
more weekly applications beginning about the time the vines begin to run (about
4 weeks after planting for bush varieties).  Carruth and Howe (1948) have shown
a difference in varietal susceptibility to squash vine borers; insofar as
possible choose a more susceptible variety.


     Sampling:—Look  for wilted plants or masses of coarse excrement, especially
on the stem near the  ground level, which the borer has pushed out of the plant.

     Count the number of wilted plants/10-25 examined.

     Check 10-25 plants for borer tunnels.  Record the number of tunnels and
dissect for total larval counts.  Carruth and Howe (1948) counted all plants in
a given treatment and determined the percent infested with borers.

     Take yield records.  Record total number of fruits harvested and average
number and weight of  fruit/plant.  Records may be taken from the entire plot or
representative section therefrom.
Pickleworm, Diaphania nitidalis  (Stoll)  and Melonworm, Diaphania hyalinata
(Linnaeus)

     These insects are  similar and  can be evaluated by essentially the same
techniques.  There are  some  differences, however.

     Fruits of muskmelon,  cucumber  and squash are severely injured by the
pickleworm, Diaphania nitidalis  (Stoll), watermelon rarely and  pumpkin not at
all.   Earlier in the season the  stems,  terminal buds and blossoms are
attacked.  The melonworm,  Diaphania hyalinata  (Linnaeus), on the other hand,
rarely enters the vine  or  leaf petioles  but feeds extensively on the leaves.
Unlike the pickleworm,  the melonworm attacks pumpkin.

     Brett and Sullivan (1970) have found considerable variation in the
relative  susceptibility of cucurbit varieties to pickleworm injurv.  When
choosing  a test variety, try to  select one that is favored by pickleworms.

     Unless foliage  injury is severe, treat about 1 week before fruit set and
make weekly applications thereafter.

-------
                                  -78-
     Sampling:—Counts of infested fruit are reliable  (Canerday  1967).   Check
10-25 fruit or more/plot and record the number infested.  If time permits,
dissect for actual worm count.   Frequent checks may be necessary since infested
fruit will rot and disappear in short order.

     Familiarize yourself thoroughly with the different types of foliage
injury and record in as many ways as possible: infested stems, terminal buds
or blossoms/10-25 plants/plot in the case of the pickleworm.  Check foliage
of 10-25 plants/plot for melonworms.

     Take yields.  Count damaged and undamaged fruit: record the weight of
marketable fruit and average weight.  Records may be taken from the entire plot
or representative section therefrom.
Melon Aphid (Aphis gossypii Glover)

     Symptoms in the field first appear as the edges of cucurbit leaves begin
to curl downward with some of them wilted, shriveled, and brown.  Like other
species of aphids, the melon aphid,  Aphis gossypii Glover, sucks the sap from
the plants causing reduced yields of poor quality.  They also transmit cucumber
mosaic virus.

     In most test areas, aphids appear in conjunction with tests aimed at other
insects.  Occasionally, however, control investigations are started after an
aphid outbreak or as a matter of routine infestation.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of total number of aphids/10-25 leaves/plot,
selected from different plants.

     Evaluate plant condition through a foliage or tip injury rating code.

     Take yields.  Record number and average size of fruit.  If some fruit
is unmarketable, determine the number and percent.  Records may be taken from
the entire plot or representative section therefrom.
Cabbage Looper (Triahoplusia ni (Hubner))

     This cabbage looper, Triohoplusia ni (Hubner), has expanded its host range
to a remarkable extent in recent years, especially in the middle Atlantic and
southeastern states.  Cucurbits, cucumbers in particular, have been hard hit and
the looper is now regarded as a major pest of these crops in Virginia and border-
ing states.

     Published references concerning looper control on cucurbits appear to be
virtually non-existent.  However, the same record taking techniques listed under
the Crucifers are generally applicable for this group also.


     Sampling:—After each application, evaluate the results by selecting 10-25
plants or leaves/plot (dependent on the infestation level) and count all the
loopers.   Divide loopers into size classifications similar to that used by Hale
and Shorey (1972).

-------
                                   -79-
     Take yield records.  Records may be taken from the entire plot or represen-
tative section therefrom.
Mites (Tetranuchus sppj

     In hot, dry years several species of mites that occur in different regions
often cause rather severe injury to cucurbits.  Injury takes the form of a
yellowish, chlorotic effect on the leaves and results in greatly reduced vigor
and yield.  As in the case of the cabbage looper, there seems to be little in
the way of published references concerning mite control on cucurbits.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts on the number of mites per 10-25 leaves/plot.
If populations are too high, excise 3.22 cm2 (0.5 in. ) or 6.44 cm2 (1.0 in.2)
leaf samples and count the mites thereon.  These may be supplemented with
visual ratings of plant vigor.

     Take yields, record the total number and average weight of marketable
and unmarketable fruit.  Records may be taken from the entire plot or representa-
tive section therefrom.
                             References

Brett, Charles H. , and Michael J.  Sullivan.  1970.  The use of resistant varieties
     for control  of insects on cucurbits in North Carolina.  N.C. State Agria.  Exp.
     Sta. Bull. 440,  25 pages.

Canerday, T. Don.  1967.   Control of  the pickleworm on cucurbits.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  60(6):1705-1708.

Carruth, L.A., and W.L. Howe.  1948.   Factors affecting use and phytotoxicitv of
     DDT and other insecticides  for squash borer control.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     41(3):352-355.

Fisher, G.T., and R.  Green.  1965.  Sauash bug control on  field pumpkin.  Proc.
     N. Central BY. ESA 20:123-124.

Gould, George E.  1969.  Cucumber  beetle control on cucurbit crops. Proc. N.
    Central BY. ESA 24(2):119-124.

Hale, R.L., and H.H.  Shorey.  1972.  Cabbage looper control on cole crops in
     southern California:  Granular insecticides in the soil indicate lack  of
     promise.  J. Econ. Entomol.   65(6):1658-1661.

Hofmaster, R.N.,  and  R.L. Waterfield.   1972.  Insecticide  control of  the potato
     tuberworm in late crop potato foliage.  Am. Potato J.  ^9:383-390.

Roberts, J.E. , and L.E. Anderson.  1960.  Pickleworm control and residue studies
     with malathion and Phosdrin.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  53(3):482-483.

Staples, Robert,  Mansoor Ahmad,  Sadia  Chawdhry, and Gabriel Diaz.   1967.
     Effectiveness of several insecticides in controlling  cucumber  beetles  in
     eastern Nebraska.  J. Econ. Entomol.  60(2):463-466.

-------
                                  -80-
Waites, R.E.,  and D.H. Habeck.  1968.  Evaluation of insecticides for control
    of the pickleworm on summer scmash.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  61(4):1097-1099.
                           IRISH POTATOES
     Irish potatoes, Solanwn tuberosum, are one of the basic food crops in the
world.  In addition, they support a wide variety of insect pests, some of which
occur in all areas where potatoes are produced.
Colorado Potato Beetle, Leptinotarsa decemlineata (Say)

     The Colorado potato beetle, Leptinotarsa deoemlineata (Say), is well known
to practically everyone.  After almost having been eliminated as a potato pest
during the 1950's, this native species has increased to such an extent that it
is the limiting factor in Irish potato production in New York, Virginia and
other eastern and southeastern states.  Due to its importance, in this outline
we will emphasize suggested practices for this pest, with the view in mind that
other insects and injury may be sampled and recorded using the same basic test
structures.  Both foliage sprays and systemic granulars applied to the soil
should be evaluated.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a variety or varieties of Irish
potatoes commonly grown in the area in question.  Since some potato varieties
respond differently to insecticidal treatments, especially the soil systemics
(Getzin and Chapman 1959, Hoyman 1969, Libby 1971), it is highly desirable
to observe as many varieties as possible.  A uniform soil for the test area is
desirable since the degree of control of plant response may vary in different
soil types.


     Experimental Design:—

     Ground Application-A randomized complete-block design with three or more
replications per treatment is suggested.  Ideally, candidate insecticide per-
formance should be compared with untreated plots and one or more standard
insecticides recommended for the area in question.  However, if it is impossible
to have untreated controls, it should be sufficient to compare the treatments
with one or more recommended standards.

     Plot size may vary greatly, depending on the uniformity of infestation
and population density.  Hofmaster and Waterfield (1972a) obtained good results
with plots 3, 5, or 10 rows wide by 10.7 m (35 ft.) long with 3-5 untreated
rows between plots.  Subsequent unpublished investigations by these workers have
shown that 3 row plots, 10.7 m (35 ft.) long with 1 or 2 untreated rows between
plots are about the smallest units that should be used for evaluation of soil
systemics.  For "screening" purposes utilizing foliage sprays, single 7.6 m
(25 ft.) long plots with adjacent untreated rows have shown to advantage.
However, as the compounds are taken beyond the screening stage, a 3, 4, 5, or
10 row plot size is recommended.  Shands et al. (1972) employed 4 rows 7.6m
(25 ft.) long, Pond (1967) - 4 rows 11 m (36 ft.) long, Powell and Mondor (1973)

-------
                                   -81-
4 rows 30.5 m  (100 ft.) long while Bacon et al.  (1973) utilized plots  36  rows
wide x 30.5 m  (100 ft.) long.

     Aerial Application-A minimum of  2 and preferably 3 swaths each 12.2 m
(40 ft. wide)  or covering a comparable area is suggested to prevent drift and
have sufficient area in the middle of the plot to collect representative
samples.  The  length should be sufficient to enable the pilot to fly level and
safely over the plots for at least 182.6 m (600  ft.).


     Application and Equipment:—Both spray and  granular applications should be
utilized in investigating Irish potato insect control and can be adapted to
most of the species concerned.
                                                                      o
     Ground Application-Knapsack sprayers operating at 2.1 - 4.2 kg/cm
 (30-60 psi) and delivering, 187.1-935.4 liters/ha  (20-100 gallons of water/
acre) will give satisfactory results.  Calibrate  the sprayers carefully and
apply tne spray along each side of the row and over the top.  Where single
nozzles are used this will require a  trip along  each side and back over the top.
Backpack sprayers may have a spray boom equipped with 3 nozzles per row.
These nozzles  should be adjusted so as to cover  the top and sides of each row
(Hofmaster and Waterfield 1972b).

     In moving to larger plots a wide variety of pressures and rates are
encountered, e.g., Powell and Mondor  (1973) with  187.1 liters/ha (20 gallons/
acre) at low pressure and Pond (1967) 935.4-1169.2 liters/ha (100-125 gallons/
acre) at 28.1  kg/cm^ (400 psi).  Insofar as possible, all testing on larger
plots should be with eouipment that is adaptable  to the area in question.

     Granules may best be applied with a commercial granular applicator attached
to the potato  planter.  Calibrate the applicator  for each formulation and
rate and then  plant the potatoes directly without resetting.  Many methods of
granule placement are possible.  Hofmaster and Waterfield (1972a) studied 8
different methods and concluded that placing the  granules directly in the
fertilizer band on both sides of the row gave best results.  If the fertilizer
will be broadcast, place the granules about 10 cm (4 in.) from the seed-piece
and about 2.54 cm (1 in.) below the seed-piece level.  Some areas such as New
York favor placing the granules directly in the  furrow so this method should
be compared to banding.

     Aerial Application-Use nozzle arrangement and volume of finished spray
determined to be practical under existing conditions.  In most areas the spray
volume will range from 18.7-93.5 liters/ha (2-10  gallons/acre) although good
insect control has been obtained with lower or higher dosages.

     Regardless of the method of application, the eauipment should be thoroughly
cleaned before each use.  When changing treatments, the tank, boom and nozzles
should be rinsed with water run through the entire system until it is clear.

     If more than one rate (kg/ha or Ibs/acre) of toxicant is used, start the
test sequences with the lowest rate, thereby keeping the chances of contamination
at a minimum.  Generally, several rates should be applied when testing is in the
initial phase.  After the rate or rate range is  established and testing is
in the final stages, emphasis should be placed on the probable rate or rates
to be used.

-------
                                  -82-
     Sampling:—Direct counts of Colorado potato beetle egg masses and larvae
with supporting measurements of adult foliage injury, either by estimates of
defoliation or the actual number of plants defoliated, give a comprehensive
picture of performance against this pest (Hofmaster and Waterfield 1972a).

     Early adult feeding to differentiate effectiveness of soil systemics- Some
systemics become active 7-10 days after plants emerge while others are effective
almost at time of emergence.

     1.  Number of plants "stemmed" (clipped at ground level by adults feeding)
5-7 days after plant emergence.
     2.  Number of plants with noticeable foliage injury.  Rating of degree
thereof, if feasible.
     3.  Number of egg masses/10 plants may give some interesting supporting
data.

     Effectiveness against potato beetle larvae-

     1.  Number of larvae/10-25 plants or more.  Indicate approximate larval
instars.  Record data at definite intervals such as 5, 2.4, 48, and 72 hours
and 7 and 14 days in order to get idea of knockdown and residual.  The intervals
selected may be at the discretion of the observer; depending on time available
and need for additional data.
     If populations are low, plants can be artificially infested with  known
numbers of larvae from the same general area.
     2.  Some insecticides are slow in action and treated larvae may enter the
soil before dying.  Count adult emergence holes/10 samples of 0.093 sq. meters
(1 sq. ft.).

     Effectiveness against spring generation adults-

     1.  Recently emerged adults move about too much for direct counts, unless the
plots are quite large.  Numerical foliage injury ratings such as 1 to 5 (Hofmaster
and Waterfield 1972) may be used to advantage.
     Take tuber yields and specific gravities .  Evaluate potatoes according to
U.S. #1 and U.S. #2 grades.  Check on unusual effects of chemicals such as
sprouting, knobs, etc.  Yields may be from entire plots or representative sections
therefrom: convert to kg/ha or cwt/acre.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Compare treatment means using a valid
statistical method such as Duncan's multiple-range test.  Candidate insecticide
performance should be  compared with replicated untreated plots and one or more
standard insecticides recommended for the area in question.  Where it is
impossible to leave untreated areas, comparison with one or more standard
insecticides should suffice.

     The following data should be reported:

     1.  Pre-test counts to determine approximate level of the insect population
prior to treatment.  This may not be possible for all types of insects.
     2.  Insecticide formulation used and kilograms active toxicant/hectare or
Ibs. active/acre.  Describe application equipment, quantity delivered, pressure,
etc.
     3.  Insect populations on given date, stage of plant growth, and listing
of sampling technique.

-------
                                   -83-
         Plant height, stage, and condition at time of treatment and sampling.
     5.  Temperature, humidity, rainfall and general weather conditions at
treatment.  Record these for all applications and all except humidity for the
sampling dates.  Overall weather records for the entire test period may be
useful.
     6.  Percent organic matter and type of soil.
     7.  Plant response, phytotoxicity or obvious defects in the harvested crop.
Potato Flea Beetle, Epitrix cuaimeris  (Harris)

     Follow the same  general experimental technique as described for the
Colorado potato beetle.  The only variations will be in sampling.


     Sampling:—Potato flea beetles, Epitrix cucwneris (Harris) move around
so much that sampling them is difficult.  Sweeping is not reliable due to
variations in technique and nature of  the potato plant.

     Count the feeding scars on five leaves/plant, two low down, two near the
middle and one from the top of five or more plants selected at random from each
plot.  If the numbers are too large to count, excise definite areas such as
3.22 cm  (0.5 in.  ) or 6.44 cm^ (1.0 in.2) with a cork borer or other suitable
means and count the scars thereon.  (Hofmaster et al. 1967.)

     In some areas, two meaningful foliage injury counts may be taken; over-
wintered beetles,  and first brood adults.  In Virginia these would be approxi-
mately 5-6 weeks apart.  Start insecticide applications in both cases as soon as
the beetles appear.

     Flea beetle larvae work into the  soil and feed on rootlets and tubers.
Injury to the tubers consists of small holes with corky slivers or elongated
winding scars.  Count the number of scars on at least 20 tubers or section
thereof, if the injury is heavy.  (Hofmaster et al. 1967.)

     Take tuber yields and specific gravities.  Yields may be from the entire
plot or representative areas therefrom; convert to kg/ha or 100 cwt/acre.
Evaluate according to U.S. #1 or U.S.  #2 grades.
Potato Leafhopper, Empoasca fabae Harris, and Other Leafhoppers

     Follow the same  general technique as for the Colorado potato beetle.
The only variations will be in sampling.


     Sampling:—

     Adults-Check for presence of adult leafhoppers by sweeping but do not make
counts this way.  The adults are so agile that attempts to count them accurately
are not generally practical.

-------
                                  -84-
     Nymphs-

     1.  Apply regular treatment schedule and evaluate by counting the nymphs
on the underside of the leaves (Hofmaster et al. 1967).  Select at least 50
leaves/plot.
     2.  Make visual numerical ratings for development of "hopperburn" injury
by the potato leafhopper,  Empoasoa fabae Harris, and southern garden leafhopper,
Empoasca solana DeLong, also the speckled white-stippled appearance by the
western potato leafhopper, Empoasca dbrupta DeLong.  Record the extent of purple-
top wilt infection by the  aster leafhopper, MacTosteles fascifrons (Stal) and of
curly top virus infection  by the beet leafhopper, Circulifer tenellus (Baker).

     Count the number of injured or infected plants/given unit or plot and
possibly grade injuries such as "hopperburn", purple-top wilt, etc.  Check while
plants are actively growing at blossom time.

     Observe the tubers for obvious disease.  (If facilities are available, it
might be desirable to store seed and check for disease development when planted
later, either in the greenhouse or field.)

     Take yields and specific gravities' yields may be from the entire plot or
representative sections therefrom; convert to kg/ha or cwt/acre.  Evaluate
according to U.S. #1 or U.S. #2 grades.
European Corn Borer, OstTJnia nubi-lalis (Hubner)

     Irish potatoes are the principal spring host plant of the European corn
borer in Virginia and other Atlantic seaboard states.  In addition, the fall
crop is also attacked.

     Foliage treatments must be preventive by nature.  Two criteria may be used
for initiating the spray program:  1) Consistent moth flights as determined by
light trap collections; and 2) Appearance of egg masses in the field.  Successful
tests against this pest require a thorough knowledge of the life history and
cultural practices in the area in question.  Applications should be on an approxi-
mate 7 day schedule, and must be started before the borers have entered the plants,

     Soil  systemics  should also be  evaluated, especially new  chemicals.  These
must be applied at planting.


     Sampling:—Corn borer infestations are self evident as the plants either
break over or wilt and die.  Usually only one field count will be necessary but
this will entail dissection of at least 5 plants/plot - preferably 10 or more
plants.

     Insect data may be taken in several forms:  1) Number of plants injured
by corn borers; or 2) Number of borers/plant or plants.  (Hofmaster et al. 1967.)

     Supporting data should consist of yields and specific gravities.  Evaluate
as U.S. #1 or U.S. #2 grade.  Yields may be taken from entire plots or represen-
tative sections therefrom; convert to kg/ha or cwt/acre.  Note possible secondary
effects from corn borers on the tubers, such as stem-end discoloration, reduced
size, etc.

-------
                                   -85-
Potato Psyllid^ Pavatrioza cockerelli  (Sulc)

     These small insects are often called jumping plant lice and are problems in
the western states.  The feeding of potato psyllid nymphs causes a disease known
as psyllid yellows.  This is characterized by a change in color from green to light
yellow and upward curling of the leaves over the midrib.  In advanced stages the
plant appears to consist principally of primary stems.  The set of tubers is
substantially increased but they never reach marketable size; aerial tubers also
form in the leaf axils.


     Sampling:—Start  treatments when one or more adult psyllids can be caught
in 100 sweeps of a standard sweep net, with the net opening hitting 2/3 below the
top of the plants  (one adult psyllid/100 sweeps may reduce yields as much as 10
bushels per acre).  If the psyllid populations are not determined, start
insecticide applications when the plants are 6 inches tall (U.S. Agric.
Handbook 264:  Potato  Insects:  Their Biology and Control, pages 40-41).

     Make counts of the'number of psyllid nymphs on at least 25 leaves/plot.
(Gerhardt 1966.)

     Check for development of psyllid yellows.  Record the number of plants
obviously infected and group in an acceptable rating class to differentiate the
degree of injury.

     Take yields and specific gravities.  Grade potatoes carefully into U.S.
#1 and U.S. #2 classes: check size average.  Yields may be taken from entire
plot or representative sections therefrom, convert to kg/ha or cwt/acre.


                             References

Bacon, O.G., N.F. McCalley, W.D. Riley, and R.H. James.  1972.  Insecticides
     for control of potato tuberworm and green peach aphid on potatoes in
     California.  Am. Potato J.  49:291-295.

Gerhardt, Paul D.  1966.   Potato psyllid and green peach aphid control on
     Kennebec potatoes with Temik and other insecticides.  J. Econ. Entomol.
59(1):9-11.

Getzin, L.W., and R.K. Chapman.  1959.  Effect of soils upon the uptake of systemic
     insecticides by plants.  J. Econ. Entomol.  52(6):1160-1165.

Hofmaster, R.N.^and R.L.  Waterfield.  1972a.  Insecticides applied to the soil
     for the control of the Colorado potato beetle in Virginia.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.   65(6):1672-1679.

Hofmaster, R.N., and R.L. Waterfield.  1972b.  Insecticide control of the potato
     tuberworm in late crop potato foliage.  Am.  Potato J.   49:383-390.

Hofmaster, R.N., R.L. Waterfield, and J.C. Boyd.  1967.  Insecticides applied
     to the soil for the control of eight species of insects on Irish potatoes
     in Virginia.  J. Econ. Entomol.  60(5):1311-1318.

-------
                                  -86-
Hoyman, W.G.  1969.  Injury of potato foliage by systemic insecticides.  Am.
     Potato J.   46:182-183.

Libby, J.L.  1971.  Phytotoxic effects of soil applied systemic insecticides on
    Norland variety potatoes.  Proc. N.  Central. Br. ESA  26:99.

Pond, D.D.  1967.  Field evaluation of insecticides for the control of aphids
     on potatoes.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  60(5):1203-1205.

Powell, Bonnie, M., and T.W. Mondor.  1973.  Control of the green peach aphid
     and suppression of leaf roll on potatoes by systemic soil insecticides and
     multiple foliar sprays.  J. Econ. Entomol.  66(1):170-177.

Shands, W.W., and Geddes W. Simpson.  1972.  Spraying potatoes to prevent
     leafroll spread by the green peach aphid.  Am. Potato J.  49:23-34.
     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control aphids on potatoes is very similar to the method previously described
under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.   Only the modifications
of that method are noted below.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—See also Aphids and Thrips - Cruciferae and
Head Lettuce.

     In the early stages of testing,plots 3 beds wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.) long
should be large enough if the counts are made from the middle row of each plot.
     Sampling:—Count the total number of apterous aphids on 50-75 leaves per
plot.  The number of leaves selected would depend upon the intensity of the
infestation.  It is suggested that the leaves be selected at random from the
middle area of the plot.  Care should be taken to keep within a well buffered
zone.
     Small screening hand plots that are 3 beds wide by 7.6 m  (25 ft.)  should
have an observation area one bed wide and 1.5 m (5 ft.) from the end of each
plot.  This method would provide a 2 bed buffer zone on each side of each plot.

     Ground plots that are 12-16 beds wide by 18.3 m (60 ft.)  long should have
an observation area 4-6 beds wide and at least 4.6 m (15 ft.)  away from the end
of each plot.  This method would provide an 8-10 bed buffer zone on each side of
each plot.

     Air plots that are 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide by 182.9 m (600  ft.) long should
have an observation area 12.2 m (40 ft.) wide and 30.5-45.7 m  (100-150  ft.)
away from the end of each plot.  This method would provide a 24.4 m  (80 ft.)
buffer zone on each side of each plot.

-------
                                  -87-
                             References

Bacon, O.G., N.F. McCalley, W.D. Riley, and R.H. James.  1972.  Insecticides
     for control of potato tuberworm and green peach aphid on potatoes in
     California.  Am. Potato J.  49:291-295.

Gerhardt, Paul D.  1966.  Green peach aphid control on Kennebec potatoes with
     Temik and other insecticides.  J. Econ. Entomol.  59(1):9-11.

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports on file with the Entomology Department,
     University of California, Riverside, California.

Pond, D.D.  1967.  Field evaluation of aphicides for the control of aphids on
     potatoes.  J. Econ. Entomol.  60(5):1203-1205.
Potato Tuberworm, Gnorimoschema operculella (Zeller)

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control potato tuberworms is very similar to the method previously described
under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.   Only the modifications
of that method are noted below.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—In the early stages of pesticide testing,
small plots with ground applications would suffice to demonstrate efficacy if
the width and length of the plots were large enough to prevent drift of applied
materials to adjacent plots: and large enough to sample tubers without irift
from adjoining plots influencing the sampling area.

     For the very early tests that involve "screening" only, plots can be 3
beds wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.) long.  However, as the compounds are tested past
the initial screening stage, larger plots are recommended.  Plots 12-18 beds
wide by 18.3 m (60 ft.) long should be large enough to prevent the normal
movement of adult moths from unduly influencing the results between plots under
normal tuberworm pressure.

     In the final stages of pesticide development the plot size should be larger
to more closely resemble the commercial ground and air applications.  But in any
event should be large enough to prevent drift from adjacent plots from influencing
the results.  Since most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8 beds per swath,
plots should be 18-24 beds wide by 60.9 m (200 ft.) long.  The length to be
long enough to harvest a representative sample of tubers.  Air plots should
be 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide or" 3 swaths of 12.2 m (40 ft.) in width to prevent drift
and to have enough area in the middle of the plot to harvest a representative
sample of tubers.  The length to be long enough to enable the pilot to fly
level and safely over the plots for at least 182.9 m (600 ft.).


     Application and Equipment:—A broadcast boom with flat fan tips (8004
is suggested) arranged equidistant should provide optimum coverage when using
ground equipment.  When small screening tests are applied, knapsack sprayers
operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm2 (30-60 psi) will give satisfactory results.  The

-------
boom should have 3- flat fan nozzels per row.  Air application equipment
should be commercially acceptable.

     The finished spray volume per  acre would be dependent on the size of the
potato plants.   When foliar spray is applied by small hand or large ground
equipment, 227.1-378.5 liters/ha (60-100 gallons/acre) will give satisfactory
results.  When foliar spray is applied by air, 37.9-56.8 liters/ha (10-15
gallons/acre) will give satisfactory results.

     The time of application should be when the rows start to close (leaves
from adjoining beds touching across furrow).  (Note:  there is testing
presently being conducted to ascertain whether earlier pesticide applications
are feasible when '"Monitoring" traps show moth activity.)

     Since the control of tuberworms recmire preventive type treatments,
the spray should be applied every 10-14 days until harvest, making sure to
observe the waiting period from the last application to the harvest when
using registered standard materials.  The number of days interval is dependent
on the area in which the testing is being conducted.  When feasible more than
one time interval between treatments should be evaluated.
     Sampling:—Normal harvest procedures for the area in which the test is
being conducted should be followed.

     Select harvested tubers at random over a wide area of the plot so that a
representative sample can be taken, but at all times keeping within a well
buffered zone.

     Small screening hand plots that are three beds wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.)
long should have a tuber selection area one bed wide and 1.5 m (5 ft.) from
the end of each plot.  This method would provide a 2 bed buffer zone on each
side of each plot.

     Ground plots that are 12-24 beds wide by 18.3 m-60.9 m (60-200 ft.) long
should have a tuber selection area 4-8 beds wide (middle one-third) and at
least 4.6 m (15 ft.) away from the end of each plot.  This method would provide
a 8-16 bed buffer zone on each side of each plot.

     Air plots that are 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide by 182.9 m (600 ft.) long should
have a tufeer selection area 12.2 m (40 ft.) wide (middle one-third) and 30.5-
45.7 m (100-150 ft.) away from the end of each plot.  This method would provide
a 24.4 m (80 ft.) buffer zone on each side of each plot.

     The total number of tubers selected for examination per each pesticide
tested, regardless of the total number of plots, should be 500-600 tubers.
This would give a wider range of selectivity and provide a better reading of
the tuberworm damage.

     Each tuber should be examined and recorded as damaged if a tuberworm mine
is found.  Extreme care should be taken to be sure that the mine is made by
the tuberworm.   Normally one mine is enough to grade the tuber down or
discard it as a "cull", so normally the number of mines per tuber are not
significant enough to record unless "severity of infestation" type data is
requested.

-------
                                  -89-
     The total number of tubers infested is recorded as well as tbe percent
tubers infested.  Care should also be taken to separate "Green tubers" (those
that are exposed or on the surface) from the "Marketable" tubers when recording
those that are infested.
                             References

Bacon, O.G., N.7. McCalley, W.D. Riley, and R.H. James.  1972.  Insecticides
     for control of potato tuberworm and green peach aphid on potatoes in
     California.  Am. Potato J.  49:291-295.

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports on file with the Entomology Department,
     University of California, Riverside, California.

Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

Hofmaster, R.N., and R.L. Waterfield.  1972.  Insecticide control of the potato
     tuberworm in late crop potato foliage.  ,4777. Potato J.  49:383-390.

Shorey, H.H. , A.S. Deal, P.L. Hale, and. M.J. Snyder.  1967.  Control of potato
     tuberworms with phosphamidon in Southern California.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.
     60(3):892-893.
                              LETTUCE
European Lettuce Root Aphid, Pemphigus bursarius  (L.)

     The following test methodology to determine  the efficacy of insecticides
to control European lettuce root aphids on lettuce is very similar to the
method previously described under Cruciferae and  Head Lettuce - Aphids and
Thrips.  Only the modifications of that method are noted below.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—See also Aphids and Thrips - Cruciferae and
Head Lettuce.

     For the very early tests that  involve "screening" only, plots can be 2
beds (4 rows) wide by 7.6 m  (25  ft.) long.  However, as  the compounds are
tested past the initial screening stage, larger plots are recommended.  Plots
4 beds (8 rows) wide by 15.2 m  (50  ft.) long  should be large enough to provide
adequate space in the treated area.

     In the final stages of pesticide development the plot size should be
larger to more closely resemble  the commercial ground applications, but in
any event should be large enough to prevent drift from adjacent plots from
influencing the results.  Since  most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8
beds per swath, plots should be  6-8 beds wide by 30.5 m  (100 ft.) long.  The
length to be long enough to be able to randomly select and sample lettuce

-------
                                    -90-
root  systems to determine the degree of infestation and  extent  of  damage to
the plants.
     Application and Equipment:—If granular materials are used,  then  the
 hoppers,  tubes and shoes or shanks should be emptied and  inspected  to  see  that
 no material clings or plugs any part of the equipment.

     A broadcast boom with flat fan tips (8004 is suggested) arranged  equidistant
 should provide optimum coverage when using ground equipment.  For a granular
 application, equipment that meters out small amounts such as the Gandy,
 Gustafeson, etc., and is capable of dispensing the correct amounts  to  be applied
 through shanks should be used.

     The  time of application should be just before the first irrigation following
 thinning  of the lettuce.

     One  application of spray (broadcast) or granular application should be
 sufficient if the material has capabilities of controlling the lettuce root
 aphid.  Granular applications tend to provide more effective and longer control.


     For  additional information,  see Aphids and Thrips - Cruciferae  and Head
 Lettuce.
     Sampling:—Normal harvest procedures for the area in which the test is being
conducted should be followed.

     Select lettuce plants to be inspected at random over a wide area of the plot
so that a representative sample can be taken, but at all times keeping within a
well buffered zone.

     Small screening hand plots that are 2 beds (4 rows) wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.)
long should have a plant selection area from the middle two rows (inside row of
each bed), and 1.5 m (5 ft.)  from the end of each plot.

     Ground plots that are 4-8 beds (8-16 rows) by 15.2-30.5 m (50-100 ft.) should
have a plant selection area from the middle rows and 4.6 m (15 ft.)  from the end
of each plot.

     The total number of lettuce plants inspected for each plot should be at
least 25.   If 50 plants can be inspected this would give a wider range of
selectivity and provide a better reading of the lettuce root aphid infestation
and damage.

     Each  plant should be given a rating for general appearances.  The method
is immaterial as long as the  rating scale is consistent and is used only to show
any differences in the plant  on the surface that may be caused by the root aphid
below the  surface.

     Each  plant should be dug and the root system and surrounding soil area
inspected  for presence of the lettuce root aphid.

-------
                                    -91-
     To determine the degree of infestation, it is suggested that a count be
taken, for a given period of time  (2-3 min.) by 2 or 3 investigators, of the number
of aphids present on roots and in  the soil.


                                Reference

Snyder, M.F.  1975.  Personal communication.  Farm advisor, Santa Barbara County,
     Santa Maria, California.
                             LIMA BEANS
Lygus Bug, Lygus spp.

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control lygus bugs on lima beans is very similar to the method previously
described under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.  Only the
modifications of that method are noted below.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Small hand plots are not very practical
because of the mobility of the adult lygus bugs.  Plots 12-18 beds wide by 18.3 m
(60 ft.) long should be large enough to prevent the normal movement of adult
lygus from unduly influencing the results between plots under normal lygus
pressure.

     Since most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8 beds per swath, plots to
test commercial ground applicators should be 18-24 beds wide by 30.5 m (100 ft.)
long.  The length must be long enough to harvest a representative sample of bean
pods.


     Application and Equipment:—A broadcast boom with flat fan tips (#8002-
8004 is suggested) arranged equidistant should provide optimum coverage when using
ground equipment.  Air application equipment should be commercially acceptable.

     When foliar spray is applied by ground equipment, a finished spray volume of
227.1-378.5 liters/ha (60-100 gals./acre) will give satisfactory results.

     When foliar spray is applied by air, 37.9-56.8 liters/ha  (10-15 gals./acre)
will give satisfactory results.

     The most critical time for the initial treatment is when  the beans are in
the early blossom and bud stage and when the lygus population  is 1 nymph or adult
per sweep.  This method protects the young blossoms and buds and consequently
increases production of pods.  A sweep is one complete pass across one bed (2 rows)
Fifteen sweeps per area is recommended.

     The time interval from the initial application to the second treatment is
based on the number of lygus  (nymphs and adults) per sweep.  This method protects
the developing pods and maturing beans.

-------
                                    -92-
     One to three days is suggested as the initial interval between treatment
and observations and then every 7 days thereafter until control is no longer
considered economic.


     Sampling:—Count the total number of lygus nymphs and adults from 30 sweeps
per plot.  Make the sweeps across one bed (2 rows).   One complete pass equals
one sweep.  Be sure that the sweeps are made from the middle area of the plot.

     To evaluate the effect of lygus control to injury of the mature lima beans,
normal harvest procedures for the area in which the  test is being conducted
should be followed.

     Select harvested beans at random over a wide area of the plot so that a
representative sample can be taken, but at all times keeping within a well
buffered zone.  The beans can be selected directly from the bin on the harvester.
Select approximately 10-20 Ibs. of harvested beans from each plot.  From this
sample take 5-10 cups and examine each bean from each cup for lygus injury and
record as damaged.  The total number of beans from this sample is counted so that
the percent lygus injury can be recorded.

     All beans in a given area of the central part of the plot should be harvested
Marketable beans should be weighed and the data converted to kg yield per
hectare (Ibs.  yield per acre).


                                 References

Bushing, R.W., and V.E. Burton.  1974.  Partial pest management programs on dry
    large lima beans in California:  Regulation of L.  hesperus.   J.  Eoon. Entomol.
    67(2):259-261.

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports on file with  the Entomology Department,
    University of California, Riverside, California.

Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

McEwen, F.L.,  and G.E.R. Hervey.  1960.  The effect  of lygus bug control on the
    yield of lima beans.  J.  Eoon.  Entomol.   53(4):513-516.

Sanchez, R.L.   1964.  Lygus bug control during flowering in dry lima beans.
    Calif. Agric.  18:7.

Shorey, H.H.,  A.S. Deal, and M.J. Snyder.  1965.  Insecticidal control of lygus
    bugs and effect on yield and grade of lima beans.  J. Eoon.  Entomol.
    58(1):124-126.

-------
                                     -93-
                                   PEAS
Pea Aphid

     The pea aphid, Acyrthosiphon  (=Maerosiphum) pisi (Harris), is the most
serious pest of canning and dried  peas throughout the pea- and alfalfa-growing
districts of the United States and Canada.  Overwintering as eggs or as vivi-
parous females on alfalfa, clovers and other perennial legumes, where it builds
up large colonies in early spring, winged migrants appear on young pea plants
in early May.  Reproduction is rapid and colonies develop on terminal shoots
causing leaf distortion and death  of the tips.  Young pea plants are killed
outright, and yield of older plants is reduced or the quality of peas is affected.
This aphid is also an important vector of pea enation mosaic virus, also of
bean yellow mosaic of peas and alfalfa.  Most commercial growers must be prepared
to treat their pea fields and suppress this insect sufficiently to prevent partial
or complete losses of their crop  (Metcalf et al. 1962).


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select a variety or varieties of peas commonly
grown in the same geographical area.  Locate test plots near alfalfa or other
overwintering hosts for the pea aphid to increase intensity and uniformity of
infestation in peas.

     Soil type should be specified if systemics are being tested (Specht and
Chisholm 1970)-  Regional or climatic differences may influence efficiency of
the test chemical so test plots should be located in the various regions in
which peas are grown  (Kumar and Rabinder 1973).


     Experimental Design:—A randomized complete block design with four or more
replicates per treatment is suggested.  Plot size may vary greatly depending upon
the anticipated uniformity of infestation and population density, also the type of
equipment and insecticide formulation being used.

     In-furrow treatments with systemic insecticides were made in 3- to 6-row
plots that were a minimum 7 m  (20  ft.) long  (Cook et al. 1963).  Systemics in
foliar sprays were applied to peas in rows with compressed air sprayers (Apple
and Martin 1955) .  Anderson and Brooks  (1947) employed 5-row plots up to 65 m
(200 ft.) long for ground equipment with dusts, sprays, and aerosols; and for
aircraft application their plots were 1 ha  (2.47 acres) or larger.


     Application and Equipment:—Systemics are  applied to the  seed before planting
as granules in the furrow with the seed or as sprays to the foliage (Bronson and
Dudley 1951).  Dusts and low volume sprays are  applied by ground equipment or
aircraft (Anderson and Brooks 1947).


     Sampling:—Sampling methods may vary according  to the type of experiment
and condition of the crop.

-------
                                    -94-
     Cook et al. (1963)  estimated the number of living aphids on each of 20-25
randomly located pea plants in each plot and grouped them into 10 categories
from 0 aphids to more than 400.

     Anderson and Brooks (1947),  and Apple and Martin (1955) sampled populations
by jarring aphids into a pan placed beside the row of plants.

     Anderson and Brooks (1947),  Davich and Apple (1951), and others used standard
size sweep nets and a prescribed  number of strokes for collecting aphids from
plots.  The aphids were either counted or measured and the numbers estimated.

     Pretreatment samplings should be made.  Samples are usually taken 1 day
posttreatment and again 7 and 14  days (Davich and Apple 1951; Bronson and Dudley
1931).

     Take yield data including weight and quality of shelled peas, and weight
of vines.
     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—Compare treatment means using a valid
statistical method such as Duncan's Multiple Range Test.  Candidate insecticide
performance should be compared with replicated untreated plots and one or more
standard insecticides recommended for the area.

     The following data should be reported:

     1.  Make pretreatment counts to determine the approximate level of the
population prior to treatment.
     2.  Insecticide formulation used and kilograms active ingredient/hectare
(Ibs. a.i./acre).  Describe application equipment, quantity delivered, pressure,
etc.
     3.  Insect populations and stage of development on a given date, listing
sampling technique.
     4.  Plant height, stage and condition at time of treatment and sampling.
     5.  Temperature, humidity, rainfall and general weather conditions at
treatment.  Record these for all application dates and all except humidity for
the sampling dates.  Overall weather records for the entire period may be useful.
     6.  Percent organic matter and type of soil, also soil temperatures where
systemics are being tested.
     7.  Plant response, phytotoxicity or obvious defects in the harvested crop.
     8.  Yield of harvested peas and of vines.
                               References

Anderson, L.D., and J.W. Brooks.  1947.  Pea aphid control in Virginia.  J.
     Econ. Entomol.  40:199-205.

Apple, J.W., and R. Martin.  1955.  Pea aphid control with demeton  in  relation
     to pea plant maturity.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  48:193-5.

-------
                                    -95-

Bronson, I.E., and J.E. Dudley, Jr.  1951.  Two systemic insecticides for control
     ol the pea aphid.  J. Econ. Entomol.  44:747-50.

Cook,^W.C., L. Butler, K.C. Walker, and P.E. Featherston.  1963.  Granular
     in-furrow  treatments with phorate and di-syston against the pea aphid on
     peas.  J. Boon. Entomol.  56:95-98.

Davich, T.B., and J.W. Apple.  1951.  Pea aphid control with contact and systemic
     insecticidal sprays.  J. Econ. Entomol.  44:528-33.

Kumar, R. , and C.C. Burkhardt.  1973.  Cyolane and Cytrolane performance against
     pea aphids on alfalfa in two  climatically different localities.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  66:181-2.

Metcalf, C.L., W.P. Flint, and R.L. Metcalf.  1962.  Destructive and Useful
     Insects, 4th ed. , McGraw-Hill, New York.  1087 pp.

Specht, H.B., and D. Chisholm.  1970.  Influence of soil type on the efficacy
     of disulfoton and menazon in  control of pea aphid on canning peas.   J.
     Econ. Entomol.  63:1588-9.
Pea Weevil

     The pea weevil, Bruchus pisomm  (Linne), attacks peas throughout the country.
There is only one generation per year and the winter is passed in the adult stage;
in the south, the adults leave  the  seeds in  the fall and hibernate in protected
places but, in the north,  they  remain in the seeds that are left in the field or
in untreated seed that is  planted.  Adults feed on foliage and pollen of pea plants
and lay their eggs on the  pods.  Hatching larvae bore into the pods and each one
enters a separate seed.  Infested green peas at harvest have a dot-line entrance
hole which is generally overlooked  and the peas are eaten.  This pea weevil never
lays eggs on dry peas, and the  adults must get to the growing plants in the spring
or perish without laying eggs.


     Crop and Location of  Tests:—Since the  pea weevil is most serious in the dry
pea or seed growing areas  of the intermountain areas, test plots of peas should be
located in Idaho or neighboring states.  Also, establish test plots in other areas
where this insect is a serious  economic problem, especially where adults come to pea
fields from hibernating quarters.
     Experimental Design:—A randomized  complete block design with four or more
replicates per treatment  is suggested.

     Plot size of 0.0405  hectare  (0.1 acre)  is  suggested  (Brindley et al. 1948),
but plot size may vary depending  upon the anticipated uniformity of infestation
and population density.

     The experiment should include an untreated control and one or more standard
treatments for comparison with test compounds.

-------
                                    -96-
     Application and Equipment:—Make one application of dust or spray formula-
tions to the foliage of peas during the period of early bloom and before the
adults lay their eggs on the young pods.

     Adapt the equipment at hand which is being used for control of pea aphids.

     To test systemics against the pea weevil, follow the same procedures as
outlined for tests against pea aphids.


     Sampling:—Select 50-100 pea pods at harvest from each plot and observe for
adult emergence from the dry peas in late summer.  Samples can be held in screened
containers to allow normal drying and maturity of peas and yet retain emerging
weevils.  Since only one weevil develops per pea seed, the effectiveness of test
material is readily determined.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See this section under Pea Aphid.


                                 Eeferences

Brindley, T.A., R. Schopp, and F.G. Hinman.  1947.  Field tests versus
     laboratory tests with DDT against the pea weevil.  J, Eoon. Entomol.
     41:832-3.

Metcalf, C.L., W.P- Flint, and R.L. Metcalf.  1962.  Destructive and Useful
     Insects, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York.  1087 pp.
                          PEPPERS, Capsicum annuum
European Corn Borer, Ostr>in-La nubi~la1i,s (Hubner)

     The European corn borer, Ostrinia nub-ilalis (Hubner) , is a limiting  factor
in pepper production in the mid-west, mid-Atlantic states and southeastern  states.
Detection is especially difficult since the young borers  enter the fruit  under
the cap and leave little external evidence.  Due to its extreme importance  in
certain areas, suggested practices for this pest will be  emphasized.  Other insects
and injury may be sampled and recorded, using essentially these same  test methods.
Both foliage sprays and systemic granulars applied to the soil should be  evaluated.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—Select the variety or varieties commonly  grown
in the same geographic area.

-------
                                  or  more
-97-
     Exgerimental Desipnj_—

     Ground Application-A randomized complete block design with three „. ^^
replications per treatment is suggested.  Ideally, candidate insecticide perfor-
mance should be compared with one or more standard insecticides recommended for
the area in question.  However, if it ±s impossible to have untreated controls,
it should be sufficient to compare the treatments with one or more recommended
standards.

     Plot size may vary greatly, depending on the anticipated uniformity of
infestation and population density.  Hofmaster et al. (1960) used 3 row plots
15.2 m (50 ft.) long with 2 untreated rows between each plot.  Later unpublished
data showed that single 15.2 m  (50 ft.) rows with 1 adjacent untreated row gave
consistent results.  Tysowsky (1969) obtained good results by treating single
24.4 m (80 ft.) long plots bordered by untreated rows.  Burbutis et al. (1960
and 1963) and Ryder et al. (1969) conducted extensive field research on corn
borer on peppers using plots ranging from 4 rows wide x 21.3 m (70 ft.) long to
plots 122 m (400 ft.) long and  20 rows wide.  Hale and Shorey (1971) worked with
plots ranging from 6-12 rows wide and 18.3-45.7 m (60-150 ft.) long.

     Aerial Application-A minimum of 2 and preferably 3 swaths each 12.2 m
(40 ft.) wide or covering a comparable area is suggested to prevent drift and
to have sufficient area in the  middle of the plot to collect representative
samples.  The length should be  sufficient to enable the pilot to fly level and
safely over the  plots for at least 182.6 m (600 ft.).


     Application and Equipment:—Both liquid and granular applications should be
considered in investigating pepper insect control and can be adapted to most of
the species concerned.

     Ground Application-Due to  the nature of the pepper plant and difficulty
in hitting the cap area, problems of coverage can occur with backpack sprayers
although this method may be used to advantage in combating pests other than the
corn borer.

     Hofmaster et al. (1960) applied 935.4 liters of water/ha (100 gallons/acre)
at 17.6 kg/cm2 (250 psi) using  5 or 6 nozzles/row.  Tysowsky (1969) also used a
power sprayer in small plots, application was at 7.03 kg/cm2 (100 psi) at 467.7
liters/ha (50 gallons/acre).  Burbutis et al. (1960 and 1962) and Ryder et al.
(1968) conducted extensive field scale tests with power equipment delivering
467.7-935.4 liters/ha (50-100 gallons/acre) with both high pressure and air
blast sprayers.  Hale and Shorey (1971) evaluated application methods against
another pepper pest, the green  peach aphid, and found nozzle arrangement to be
important.

     Granules are usually side-dressed in the fertilizer band after the peppers
have been transplanted and are established.  Commercial applicators may be used
(Ryder et al. 1969) or hand application (Shorey 1963).  In Delmarva, two applica-
tions, one at 2-4 weeks after transplanting and another 4-6 weeks later are recom-
mended.  Placement will be governed by plant size but 5.1-12.7 cm  (2-5 in.) deep
and 7.6-15.2 cm  (3-6 in.) from  the plant are suggested.

-------
                                    -98-
     Aerial Application-Use nozzle arrangement and volume of finished spray
determined to be practical under existing conditions.  In most areas the spray
volume will range from 18.7-92.5 liters/ha (2-10 gallons/acre) although good
insect control has been obtained at lower or higher dosages.

     Regardless of the method of application, the equipment should be thoroughly
cleaned before each use.  When changing treatments, tne tank, boom and nozzles
should be rinsed with water run through the entire system until it is clear.

     If more than one rate (kg/ha or Ibs/acre) of toxicant is used, start the
test sequences with the lowest rate, thereby keeping the chances of contamination
at a minimum.  Generally, several rates should be applied when testing is in the
initial phase.  After the rate or rate range is established and testing is in the
final stages, emphasis should be placed on the rate or rates to be submitted for
registration.


     Sampling:—Check and dissect, if necessary, 25-100 mature peppers/plot for
corn borer injury.  Be sure to look carefully under the cap area.  If larger
samples with uneven numbers are collected, obtain percent infestation and convert
to arc sin ± for analysis.  (Burbutis et al.  1960 and 1962, Hofmaster et al.
1960, Rydef et al. 1969).  Since many fruits rot if infested with borers, keep a
close check for "rots" and record these.  Examine and remove "rots" as they appear.

     Take yields, recording the marketable fruit, % loss due to borers and number
of "rots".   Yields may be from the entire plot or representative sections there-
from; convert to metric tons/ha or tons/acre.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Cabbage Looper -
Cruciferae.   (Obviously,  in treatments of a precautionary type  (corn borer)
based on a preventive schedule, pre-test counts cannot be taken as such.
However, light trap collections may provide helpful information.)
Green Peach Aphid (#l) Myzus persicae (Sulz.)

     Yields may be  seriously reduced by aphid feeding and the  fruit made unsalable
 from a  black  fungus developing in aphid "honeydew" which dripped on the fruit.
 Follow  the same general procedures as outlined for corn borers.  The  only  differences
 will be in sampling.


     Sampling:—Count  the  total number of  aphids/10-100 leaves/plot or parts
 thereof,  if the infestation is heavy.  (Burbutis  et al. 1960 and 1962, Hale and
 Shorey  1971,  Hofmaster et  al. 1960, Shorey 1961 and 1963.)

     Harvest  and  record marketable fruit and peppers covered with  black "honey-
 dew" fungus.   Yields may be taken  from the entire plot or representative
 sections therefrom; convert to metric tons/ha or  tons/acre.

-------
                                    -99-
Pepper Maggot^ Zonosemata electa  (Say)

   ^  The larvae of this Tephephritid fly feed entirely inside the pepper fruits.
A single maggot makes the pepper worthless for marketing.  This pest is unusual
in that it is single brooded and  the larvae pupate in the soil, with adults
emerging the following year  (Davidson and Peairs 1966).

     Control demands a thorough knowledge of the biology.  Check for the
appearance of adults (two-winged, yellow striped flies about 0.76 cm (0.3 in.)
long) and make regular treatments as long as the flies are around.  In New
Jersey treatments should start the last week of June and continue at 7 day
intervals until July 15; treat every 10 days thereafter through July.  Plots
should be 4 rows wide by 15.2 m  (50 ft.) long with at least 4 replications.


     Sampling:—Check 50-100 fruit/plot for pepper maggot injury.  Race and Reed
of Rutgers University, New Brunswick, New Jersey, suggest the following method of
evaluation (personal communication):

     After the 3rd spray application  (usually about mid-July in New Jersey)
collect 50 peppers from the  center rows of each plot; 25% of the collected
peppers/plot should be the smallest size present in the field, ranging up to
thumbnail size; 25% should be the largest size and the remaining 50% should be
somewhere in between.

     Check for egg punctures by  examining the outside surfaces of all fruits.
The  egg puncture is easy to  spot  and  is usually typified by a small dimple-like
or depressed area.  Experience can be gained very quickly in determining those
fruits which have egg punctures  and those which do not.  Peppers with egg
puncture marks should be opened  carefully with a sharp blade.  (It is not
necessary to open those peppers which do not show the typical egg puncture
scar.)  Look for the tiny eggs on the inside surface of the fruit wall or
presence of maggots feeding  on the core.  Full grown maggots obtain a length
of approximately 6.4 cm (% inch).  Usually not more than 2 or 3 maggots occur
in each pepper and often only one.

     Record the number of fruit with  egg punctures and total number of punctures.
At the same time obtain the number of fruit infested with maggots and total
number of maggots.

     Take yields and estimate loss due  to pepper maggot.  Yields may be from the
entire plot or representative sections  therefrom; convert to metric tons/ha or
tons/acre.


                               References

Burbutis, P.P-, R.S. VanDenburgh, D.F.  Bray, and L.P- Ditman.  1960.  European
     corn borer control in peppers.  J. Soon. Entomol.  53(4):590-592.

Burbutis, P.P., D.J. Fieldhouse,  D.F. Grossman, R.S. VanDenburgh, and L.P.
     Ditman.  1962.  European corn borer, green peach aphid and  cabbage looper
     control in peppers.  J. Soon. Entomol.  55(3):285-288.

Davidson, Ralph Howard, and Leonard Marion Peairs.  1966.  Insect Pests of Farm,
     Garden and Orchard.  John Wiley  &  Sons, Inc., 675 pages  (306-307.)

-------
                                    -100-
Hale, R.L., and H.H. Shorey.  1971.  Effect of foliar sprays on the green peach
    'aphid on peppers in southern California.  J. Boon. Entomol.  64(2):547-549.

Hofmaster, R.N., D.F. Bray, and L.P. Ditman.  1960.  Effectiveness of  insecticides
     against the European corn borer and green peach aphid on peppers.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  53(4):624-626.

Ryder, J.C., P.P. Burbutis, and L.P. Kelsey.  1969.  Systemic insecticides for
     control of European corn borer and green peach aphid on peppers.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.  62(5):1150-1151.

Shorey, H.H.  1961.  Effect of various insecticide treatments on populations of
     the  green peach aphid on peppers in southern California.  J. Boon. Entomol.
     54(2):279-282.

Shorey, H.H.  1963.  Soil applications of systemic insecticides for control of
     green peach aphid on peppers.  J. Boon. Entomol.  56(3):340-342.

Tysowsky, Michael Jr.  1969.  Insecticide tests  for the control of the European
     corn borer on peppers.  Trans. Peninsula Hortic. Soo.  59:22-25.
Green Peach Aphid (#2) Mysus persicae (Sulz.)

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides to
control green peach aphids on peppers (bell or chili) is very similar to the
method previously described under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.
Only the modifications of that method are noted below.


     Crop and Location of Tests:—In early stages of testing, plots 3 beds wide
by 7.6 m (25 ft.) long should be large enough if the counts are made from the
middle row of each plot.

     Since most commercial ground applicators treat 6-8 beds per swath,  plots
to test using commercial ground applicators can be 6-8 beds wide by 18.3 m
(60 ft.) long.


     Application and Equipment:—When the pepper plants are small  enough so that
a ground application can be safely made without knocking an excessive amount of
blossoms and small pods from the plant, a row crop boom should be  used for
proper coverage.


     Sampling:—Count the total number of apterous aphids on 50-75 leaves per plot
The number of leaves selected would be dependent on the intensity  of the infesta-
tion.  It is suggested that the leaves be selected at random from  the upper one-
third and the lower one-third of the plants.  Care should be taken to keep within
a well buffered zone in the middle area on the plot.

     Small screening hand plots that are 3 beds wide by 7.6 m  (25  ft.) long
should have a leaf selection area one bed wide and 1.5 m  (5 ft.) from the  end  of
each plot.  This method would provide a 2 bed buffer zone on each  side of  each
plot.

-------
                                    -101-
     Ground plots that are 6-8 beds wide by 18.3 m  (60 ft.) long should have
a leat selection area 2-4 beds wide and at least 4.6 m (15 ft.) away from the
end of each plot.  This method would provide a 4 bed buffer zone on each side
of each plot.

     Air plots that are 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide by 182.9 m  (600 ft.) long should
have a leaf selection area 12.2 m  (40 ft.) wide (middle one-third) and 30.5-
45.7 m (100-150 ft.) away from the end of each plot.  This method would provide
an 24.4 m  (80 ft.) buffer zone on  each side of each plot.


                                References

Burbutis, P.O., D.J. Fieldhouse, D.F. Grossman, R.S. VanDenburgh, and L.P. Ditman.
     1962.  European corn borer, green peach aphid  and cabbage looper control in
     peppers.  J. Eoon. Entomol.   55(3):285-288.

Hale, R.L., and H.H. Shorey.  1971.  Effect of foliar sprays on the green peach
     aphid on peppers in Southern  California.  J.  Eoon. Entomol.   64(2):547-549.

Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports on file with the Entomology Department,
     University of California, Riverside, California.

Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

Hofmaster, R.N., D.F. Bray, and L.P. Ditman.  1960.  Effectiveness of insecticides
    against the European corn borer and green peach aphid on peppers.  J. Eaon.
     Entomol.  53(4):624-626.

Shorey, H.H.  1963.  Soil applications of systemic  insecticides for control of
     the green peach aphid on peppers.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  56(3):340-342.

Shorey, H.H., and R.L. Hale.  1963.  Control of green peach aphid on peppers.
     Calif. Agric.  17(12):10-11.
                  SNAP BEANS, LIMA BEANS AND  SOUTHERN PEAS


     The crops include snap bean - Phaseolus  vulgar-is, lima bean - Phaseolus
lunatus, and cowpea or southern pea  - Vigna sinensis.  These beans are infested
by a large number of insect pests both  in  the field and  in storage.
Mexican Bean Beetle, Epilao'hna varivestis Mulsant

     The Mexican bean beetle, Epilaahna varivestis Mulsant, has received more
research efforts and publicity than any other bean pest.  Like so many imported
pests, its spread was extremely rapid, especially after moving eastward across
the Mississippi around 1920.  Suggested test procedures for this insect will be
emphasized.  However, other insects and injury may be  sampled and recorded
employing the same or quite similar test methods.  Both foliage sprays and  systemic
granulars should be evaluated.

-------
                                    -102-


     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control the Mexican bean beetle on beans is very similar to the method
previously described under  Cabbage Looper - Cruciferae.  Only the modifications
of that method are noted below.


     Experimental Design:—Plot size may vary greatly, depending on the uniformity
of infestation and population density.  The following references to plot size are
not limited to Mexican bean beetle investigations but include other bean pests.

     Chalfant (1973) employed plots 15.2 m (50 ft.) long by 4-6 rows wide in
southern pea studies in Georgia.  Judge et al. (1973) used 2 row 18.3 m (60 ft.)
long plots with 2 buffer rows while Webb et al. (1970) obtained good results with
single 9.1 m (30 ft.) rows.  Comments from a number of workers indicated that 3-6
row plots ranging from 9.1 m (30 ft.) to 22.9 m (75 ft.) in length should afford
good test conditions for the entire bean insect complex.  Where optimum stress is
desired, single row 9.1 m  (30 ft.) to 22.9 m (75 ft.) long plots with 1 or more
buffer rows may be used to advantage.


     Application and Equipment:—Specially adapted small plot sprayers such as
the C02 sprayer used by Wolfenbarger and Schuster  (1963) are helpful.  Mechanized
equipment (Chalfant 1973)  in which a tractor drawn sprayer delivering 467.7
liters/ha (50 gallons/acre) at 3.5 kg/cm2 (50 psi) with 3 nozzles/row, can be
used in small plots to simulate field scale conditions.

     Granules may be applied with a commercial granular applicator attached to
the planter.  Calibrate the applicator for each formulation and rate and then
plant directly without resetting.  Webb et al. (1970) used an Alan distributor in
placing the granules 2.54  cm (1.0 inch) below the seeds in the furrow or 5.08 cm
(2.0 inches) to the side of the beans.  Judge et al. (1970)distributed the granules
directly over the beans; whereas Fisher (1966) placed the granules in the
fertilizer band.  Ideally, the insecticides should be placed approximately 5.1 cm
(2.0 inches) to the side of the beans and at this same depth.  Whatever the place-
ment decided upon, be sure to pinpoint the granular location as accurately as
possible.  Although many chemicals are phytotoxic when in direct contact with
the seeds, it will be advisable to include a direct contact series.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of larvae, taking samples of 10-25 plants/plot.
If populations are not too heavy, record all larvae on the plant; otherwise
check the larvae on at least 25 leaves/plot.  Judge et al. (1970) sampled 15 plants/
plot.  The pupae attach themselves directly to the leaves.  Occasionally it is
desirable to make pupal counts, providing the initial treatment was applied prior
to pupation.  A further check on insecticidal efficiency may be obtained by
determining whether adults emerge from pupae present at the time of treatment.

     Activity of the test  insecticide against the adults should be determined
by feeding injury ratings.

     Take yield records -  2 or 3 harvests.  Checks on pod quality and size may
show unexpected differences.  Records may be from  entire plot or representative
sections therefrom.

-------
                                    -103-
Bean Leaf Beetle, Cerotoma tr-ifuroata  (Forster)

     Damage by bean leaf beetles, Cerotoma trifurcata (Forster), is two-fold.
The adults feed on the underside of the leaves, eating rounded holes in them,
while the larvae feed underground on the roots and stems, often girdling the
plants.


     Sampling:—

     Adults-Make direct counts on 10-25 plants/plot.  Supplement with counts of
feeding holes/10-25 leaves/plot.

     Larvae-Remove plants from the soil and examine roots for larval injury and/
or larvae.  Check 5-10 plants/plot at  least one time.

     Take yields from 2 or 3 harvests, either from the entire plot or represen-
tative sections therefrom.
Bean Aphid, Aphis fabae Scopoli

     As is the case with most aphids, continuous feeding by the bean aphid,
Aphis fabae Scopoli, causes the leaves to turn yellow, plants to become dwarfed
and malformed with quality and yield reduced.


     Sampling:—Dependent on populations, count all aphids on 10-25 leaves/plot
or representative portions of 3.22 cm  (0.5  in.2) or 6.44 cm^ (1.0 in. ) therefrom.
Hagel  (1970) found samples of 25 leaflets to be adequate.

     Take yields from 2 or 3 harvests and record differences in size and
quality of pods.  Records may be from the entire plot or representative sections
therefrom.
Cowpea Curculio, Chaloodermus aeneus Boheman

     The curculio larvae feed within the developing seeds of various members of the
bean family but prefer southern peas.  Infestation usually occurs in the field
where the female deposits eggs in feeding punctures as the southern peas begin to
form.  Pea pods infested with curculio can be recognized by small, brown, wart-
or blister-like spots on the surface.  These are either feeding punctures or
areas present which may contain an egg or small grub.  Make 3-5 treatments  at  4-5
day intervals, beginning at blossoming.

     Sampling:—Chalfant (1973) collected 50-100 pods/plot at  5-7 days after the
last treatment.  The pods were shelled and feeding and oviposition punctures
(stings) on the green peas recorded.  Other workers including Dupre and Beckham
(1955) and Wolfenbarger and Schuster (1963) supplemented the above technique by
collecting 50-100 pods at the developmental stage for processing, placing them
in holding containers fitted in such a manner as to allow the larvae to fall to
the bottom as they matured and left the peas.

-------
                                    -104-


     Examine 50-100 pods/plot for stings, feeding punctures and damaged peas.
Record the number of injured and uninjured pods and also the number of damaged
peas and punctures/pod.

     Place 50-100 pods/plot in holding cartons and check for larval emergence.
Records should be taken of the total numbei of emerged larvae and damaged peas.

     Take yield records and estimate loss due to the curculio.  Records may
be from the entire plot or representative sections therefrom.
Leafhoppers

     Two species of leafhoppers,  the potato leafhopper,   Empoasea fabae (Harris),
and beet leafhopper,  Ci-TOulifer tenellus (Baker), cause extensive damage to beans.

     The potato leafhopper causes dwarfed, crinkled and curled foliage, rosette
formation, or small triangular brown areas at the tips of the leaves, gradually
spreading around the entire margin.  Affected plants produce few pods.

     The beet leafhopper carries a virus disease known as "curly top" and is
limited to the western areas.  Beans in the seedling or crookneck stage are most
susceptible to curly top and usually die when infected.  However, plants infected
when they are in a more advanced stage of growth often survive but produce
stunted pods.  Curly top is the most important factor limiting the growing of
snap beans for seed in southcentral Idaho where the bulk of the nation's bean
seed is produced.  Unlike the potato leafhopper, the beet leafhopper does not
reproduce on bean plants.


     Sampling:—Count the number of potato leafhopper nymphs on 10-25  leaves/
plot or, if the infestation is not heavy, on the entire plant.  Judge et al.
(1970) found counting all the nymphs on 15 plants to be practical.  Supplement
these counts with an evaluation of leafhopper damage to the foliage.  Record
plants with visible symptoms and grade according to severity.

     Count the number of beet leafhopper adults/10-25 plants/plot.  To do so will
require a special sampling cage similar to the one developed by Hills (1933) and
widely accepted by entomologists in the curly top areas. Supplement these counts
with an evaluation of curly top damage.  Make observations shortly after plant
emergence and record plant stand since young plants may be killed.  Check for
stunted and distorted plants.

     Make several harvests.  Look closely for small, malformed pods and
compare these with the number of apparently normal pods.  Records may be taken
from the entire plot or representative sections therefrom.


                               References

Chalfant, Richard B.  1973.  Cowpea curculio:  Control in southern Georgia.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  66(3):727-729.

Dupre, M., and C.M. Beckham.  1955.  The cowpea curculio, a pest of southern peas.
     Ga. Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.  N.S. 6, 32 p.

-------
                                    -105-
      '   •  •   1966.  Control of the potato leafhopper on canning lima beans using
     systemic insecticides.  Proc. N.  Central Br. ESA 21:120-122.

 a^£ '   '  '   1970.  Systemic insecticides and control of insects and mites on
     beans,   j.  Econ.  Entomol.   63(5):1486-1489.

Hills,  Orin A.  1933.   A new method for collecting samples of insect populations.
     J.  Boon. Entomol.  26(4)-.906-910.

Judge,  F.D.,  F.L. McEwen, and H.B. Rinick, Jr.  1970.  Field testing candidate
     insecticides on beans and alfalfa for control of Mexican bean beetle,
     potato leafhopper and plant bugs in New York state.  J.  Eoon.  Entomol.
     63(l):58-62.

Webb, Ralph E.,  Floyd F. Smith, and A.L. Boswell.  1970.  In-furrow applications of
     systemic insecticides for control of Mexican bean beetle.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.
     63(4):1220-1223.

Wolfenbarger, D.A., and M.F. Schuster.  1963.  Insecticides for control of the
     cowpea curculio,  Chaloodermus aeneus, in southern peas.   -J.  Eoon.  Entomol.
     56(6)-.733-736.
                              SWEET CORN
Corn Earworm, HeUothis zea  (Boddie)

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides
to control corn earworms on  sweet corn is very similar to the method previously
described under CruCiferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.  Only the
modifications of that method are noted below.
     Crop and Location of Tests:—The plot size should depend on the stage of
pesticide development.  In the early stages, small hand applications would
suffice to demonstrate efficacy, either as dusts or sprays.  For the very early
tests that involve "screening" only, plots can be 3 rows wide by 15.2 m (50 ft.)
long.

     In the final stages of pesticide development the plot size should be larger
to more closely resemble the commercial ground applications.  But in any event
should be large enough to prevent drift from adjacent plots from influencing
the results.  Plots should be a minimum of 4 rows wide by 60.9 m (200 ft.) long.

     Airplane applications are ineffective on moderate to heavy earwonn popula-
tions which occur in most market sweetcorn-producing areas of the middle and
southern parts of the U.S.A.


     Application and Equipment:—Preliminary tests can be hand treatments either
as dusts or sprays.  Large scale field tests should be made with a high clearance
spray rig, using 2-4 nozzles per row adjusted to cover only the ear area with
particular attention to thorough coverage of the silks.

-------
                                    -106-
     Satisfactory results can be obtained by applying a finished spray volume of
113.6-189.3 liters/ha (30-50 gals./acre).  A moderately coarse spray with
hollow cone nozzles provides good results.

     The time of application should be when the corn ears start to silk.  It
should be remembered that the problem is primarily with eggs laid on the silks
and the young larvae hatching from these eggs in 3-5 days.

     In view of the fact that the larvae migrate down the silk and soon are
concealed within the silk channel between the husks at the tip of the ear and the
silk grows rapidly, it is necessary to make 3-6 applications at 2-3 day intervals
for adequate control.


     Sampling:—Select at random 25-50 ears from the middle row or rows from each
plot.  Keep 1.5-3.0 m (5-10 ft.) away from the end of each plot when sampling the
ears.  Each ear should be carefully examined for earworm damage and recorded.  The
data should be recorded as "percent ears infested".
                               References
Anderson, L.D.  1975.  Personal communication.  Entomology Department, University
     of California, Riverside, California.

Anderson, L.D., and H. Nakakihara.  1968.  Toxicity of pesticides to corn earworm
     on sweet corn in Southern California.  J. Eoon.  Entomol. 61(6):1477-1482.
Fall Armyworm, Spodoptera frugiperda (Smith)

     The fall armyworm, Spodoptera fTugiperda (Smith), is often found associated
with corn earworms and will generally be controlled in the sweet corn ear with the
same sprays used against earworms.  However, there are some important differences
in habit that make the fall armyworm a special problem at times.

     Quite often, especially following cool, wet springs, tremendous fall armyworm
outbreaks occur making crop protection almost impossible.  Unlike the earworm,
which lays its eggs singly for the most part, the fall armywofm deposits up to 100
or more eggs in clusters.  Then, too, earworms seldom become numerous enough to
seriously damage young sweet corn whereas fall armyworms may completely destroy
a planting within a short time after plant emergence.  Brett (1953), working in
North Carolina, has stated that the fall armyworm is the limiting factor in the
production of late sweet corn in that area.  The same is true for Virginia.

     No attempt will be made to discuss plot size or equipment for  treatment once
the silk stage is reached since the techniques for earworm control  will be appli-
cable.  However, due to the habits of the fall armyworm in feeding  deep in the
whorls of the young sweet corn plant, it will be necessary to apply chemicals from
an overhead boom directly above.  Harrison et al. (1959) and Reed  (1959) were
among the first to recognize the possibility of using granulars on  sweet corn.

-------
                                     -107
     In most sweet corn areas it will be necessary to maintain a 2-3 day or
shorter application schedule after silking begins.


     Sampling^ — Make direct counts of armyworms or armyworm injury in 10-50 corn
plants (Harris 1961, Janes 1974, Reed 1959).  Henderson et al. (1962) point out
the necessity of unrolling the leaves and thoroughly examining the whorls.  If
the plants have been rather severely injured prior to treatment, be sure to base
the records on fresh damage.  Foliage injury ratings may be useful also.

     Count the armyworm infestation in  samples of at least 25 ears/plot (Bowman
and Young 1969, Janes  1973).  Carefully observe and record the degree of injury
into the same classes  as  used forearworms.


                              References

Bowman, M.C., and  J.R. Young.  1969.  Persistence and degradation of residues of
    Ciba C-9491 and their control  of fall armyworms and corn earworms.  J. Econ.
    Entomol.  62(6) :1468-1472.


Brett, Charles H.   1953.   Fall armyworm control on late planted sweet corn.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  46(4) :714-715.

Harris, Emmett D.,  Jr.  1961.  DDT spray formulations and dosages for control of
     corn stem weevil, Hyperodes hum-il-is ., and fall armyworms, Layphgma frugiperda.,
     on sweet corn.  J. Econ. Entomol.  54(3) :546-549.

Harrison, Floyd P., Roderick M. Coan, and L.P. Ditman.  1959.  Experiments on
     control of fall armyworm in sweet  corn.  J. Econ. Entomol.  52(5) :838-840.

Henderson, C.F., H.G.  Kinzer, and  J.H.  Hatchett.  1962.  Insecticidal field
     screening tests against the fall armyworm in sorghum and corn.  J.  Econ.
     Entomol.  55(6) -.1005-1006.

Janes, M.J.  1973.  Corn  earworm   and fall  armyworm occurrence and control in
     sweet corn ears in Florida.   J. Econ.  Entomol.  66(4) :973-974.

Janes, M.J.  1974.  Foam  application of methomyl  to sweet corn and leafy
     vegetables.   J. Econ. Entomol.  67(2) :249-250.

Reed, John P.  1959.   The role of  granulated  insecticides for control of  sweet
    corn pests in  New  Jersey.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  52(5) :972-974 .
 Corn Flea Beetle, Chaetocnema pullcai"La Melsheimer

     Very  little  literature  is  available on the control of  the corn flea  beetle,
Chaetocnema pulicaria Melsheimer.   This  pest is important for two  reasons:
1) It may  completely destroy young  corn  seedlings  by direct feeding;  and  2)  Over-
wintered beetles  carry  bacterial wilt  (Stewart's disease) within their  bodies
and  transmit  it to  the  corn  plants,  where it is picked up by uninfected beetles
who may carry the disease  to other  healthy corn plants.

-------
                                    -108-
     Robert (1955)  states that "the growing of resistant varieties is the only
practicable way of  controlling bacterial wilt."  However, at about this same
time Adams and Chupp (1954)  and Luckman (1955) demonstrated that flea beetle
control with insecticides would definitely reduce Stewart's disease in sweet corn.

     In determining efficiency of insecticides, plot size need not be large but,
due to the activity of infectious beetles, each plot should be isolated as much
as possible from other treated areas.   Henderson et al. (1962) treated 3 row,
15.2 m (50 ft.) long areas but had each plot bordered by up to 6 adjacent untreat-
ed rows.


     Sampling:—Count the number of flea beetles on 25-100 sweet corn plants/
plot.  Henderson et al. (1962) used a Hills' sampling cage in determining flea
beetle populations  (Hills 1933).

     Later in the season rate the incidence of bacterial wilt.  Be sure to
familiarize yourself with the symptoms as they are described by Robert (1955).

     Take yield records, noting number, weight, size and general conformation
of the ear.  Measurements as to plant height and observations on general
condition may be helpful.


                              References

Adams, J. Alfred, and Charles Chupp.  1954.  Flea beetle control - a preventive of
     Stewart's disease on sweet corn.   Farm Res., New York, Geneva Agric. Expt.
     Stn.  20(2):8-9.

Henderson, C.F., H.G. Kinzer, J.H. Hatchett, and E.G. Thompson.  1962.  Field
     insecticide screening tests against the corn flea beetle.  J. Boon.  Entomol.
     55(6):1008-1009.

Hills, Orin A.  1933.  A new method for collecting samples of insect populations.
     J. Eaon. Entomol.  26(4):906-910.

Luckman, W.H.  1955.  A new way of reducing Stewart's disease in sweet corn.
     Proc. N. Central Br. ESA  10:79.

Robert, Alice L.  1955.  Bacterial Wilt and Stewart's Leaf Blight of Corn.
     U.S. Dep. Agric. Farmers Bull.  2092.  13p.
European Corn Borer, Ostrinia nubilalis (Hubner)

     The European corn borer, Ostrinia nubilalis (Hubner), is often associated
with corn earworms and generally will be controlled in the sweet corn ear with
the same sprays and schedule used against earworms.  There are some important
differences in habit that make the corn borer a special problem in certain areas.

     The European corn borer moths, in contrast to the corn earworm adult which
lays its eggs singly for the most part, deposits its eggs in clusters of up  to
50 on the undersides of the leaves.  The young worms bore into various parts of
the plant, ears included, and often cause the stalks to break and ear section to

-------
                                     -109-


  me m contact with the ground.  Unless  the corn borers are controlled, complete
 osses of sweet corn plantings may occur, especially in late summer in the south-
eastern states.  Damage to the ears may be especially critical since the borers
o ten feed along the entire length of the ear, rendering it entirely unfit for
marketing or processing.

     No attempt will be made  to discuss plot size or equipment once the silk
stage is reached since the techniques for earworm control will be applicable.
However, due to the habits of corn borers in feeding deep within the whorls of
the young sweet corn plant, it will be necessary to apply chemicals from an over-
head boom directly above the  row.  Harrison et al.  (1959) and Reed (1959) were
among the first to recognize  the  possibility of using granulars against sweet
corn pests.

     In most sweet corn areas it  will be  necessary  to maintain a 2-3 day applica-
tion schedule  after silking begins.  Earlier in the season, applications may be
based on light trap collections of moths, the number of egg masses or egg hatch.
Harrison and Press (1971) have reviewed the literature on timing of treatments
for corn borer control and conclude  that  those who  have worked with this phase
have many points of view and  have approached the problem from many aspects.  From
this it would  appear unwise to attempt to establish definite overall guidelines.
Instead check  local practices for the area concerned.  Pest management groups
working with corn borers should be able to give helpful advice.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of corn borers and borer injury in 25-100
sweet corn plants  (Harrison and Press 1971, Hudson  1962 and 1963).  Dissect the
plants and record the number  of larvae, total number of tunnels and number of
infested plants.

     Count the corn borer infestation in  samples of 25-100 ears/plot.  Carefully
observe and record the degree of  injury into the same classes as used for earworms.


                              Eeferences

Harrison, Floyd P., Roderick  M. Coan, and L.P. Ditman.  1959.  Experiments on
     control of fall armyworm in  sweet corn.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  52(5):838-840.

Harrison, Floyd P., and John  W. Press.  1971.  Timing of insecticide applications for
     European  corn borer control  in  sweet corn.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  64(6):1496-1499.

Hudson, M.  1962.  Field experiments with Bacillus  thuringiensis and chemical
     insecticides for the control of the  European corn borer, Ostrinia nubilalis,
     on sweet  corn in southwestern Quebec.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  55(1):115-117.

Hudson, M.  1963.  Further field  experiments on  the use of Bacillus thuringiensis
     and chemical insecticides for the control of the European corn borer,
     Ostrinia  nubilalis, on sweet corn in southwestern Quebec.  J. Eoon.  Entomol.
     56(6):804-808.

Reed, John P-  1959.  The role of granulated insecticides  for  control of  sweet
     corn pests in New Jersey.  J. Eoon.  Entomol.   52(5):972-974.

-------
                                     -110-
                   TOMATOES, Lycopersicon esoulentwn
Tomato Fruitworm, Hel-iothis zea (Boddie)

     The tomato fruitworm, Hel-ioth-is zea (Boddie) ,  is the most serious pest of
tomatoes in the United States and is especially damaging in the southern areas.
The fruitworm is a most versatile insect and is also known as the corn earworm
and cotton bollworm.  Due to its overall importance, suggested practices for this
pest will be emphasized.  Other insects and injury may be sampled and recorded
using essentially the same test method.  Both foliage sprays and systemic granulars
applied to the soil should be evaluated.  The specialized tomato growing procedure
of pole culture is covered under Tomatoes, Poled.

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides to
control tomato fruitworms on tomatoes is very similar to the method previously
described under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.   Only the modifica-
tions of that method are noted below.
     Experimental Design:—Plot size may vary greatly, depending on the anticipated
uniformity of infestation and population density-  Unpublished data at the
Virginia Truck and Ornamentals Research Station, Painter, Virginia, indicates that
single row 13.7 m (45 ft.) long plots with adjacent untreated rows are entirely
satisfactory but would approach the minimum size.  There is little evidence to
indicate that the buffer row was really necessary when the tomatoes were planted
in rows 1.8 m (6 ft.) apart.  Harding (1971) favored plots two rows wide and 10.7 m
(35 ft.) long.  Middlekauf et al. (1963) used larger plots, 10 rows 1.5 m (5 ft.)
wide by 15.2 m (50 ft.) long, when treatments were made in a commercial field.
Shorey and Hill (1963) obtained good results in commercial fields with plots
approximately one-half the size of the above.


     Application and Equipment:—Hofmaster and Waterfield (unpublished data at
the Virginia Truck and Ornamentals Research Station, Painter, Virginia) have
utilized a Hudson Porta-Power high pressure sprayer, equipped with 37.9 liter (10
gallon)  milk cans, in applying tomato insecticides.  Application was at 935.4
liters/ha (100 gallons/acre) in 1.8 m (6 ft.) rows at 17.6 kg/cm2  (250 psi) with 6
nozzles/row.  Some workers have gone to the other extreme, e.g. Harding (1971)
treated with a C02 tractor mounted sprayer operating at 2.1 kg/cm2 (30 psi) and
delivering 40.2 liters/ha (4.3 gallons/acre).

     Due to the many variations possible in spraying techniques on tomatoes it
would seem rather useless to attempt to standardize, especially in field scale
plots.  The most practicable end results for large plots will be obtained by
utilizing commercial spray practices best adapted to the area concerned.

     Granules may best be applied with a commercial granular applicator specially
adapted for direct seeded tomatoes or transplants.  Be sure to place granules in
the same relative positions consistently.  Calibrate the granular  applicator care-
fully for each formulation and rate and then plant the tomatoes directly without
resetting.

     See also Cabbage Looper - Cruciferae for further details on ground and aerial
applications.

-------
                                     -Ill-


     Sampling:—Make direct  counts  of  fruitworm damaged tomatoes.  Fruitworms feed
mainly on the tomato fruit,  attacking  tomatoes of all sizes.  They do not usually
confine their feeding  to  a single  tomato  but move from fruit to fruit.  Sometimes,
however, the only  evidence of  a  nearly grown fruitworm will be a very small pinhole
where the newly hatched  fruitworm  entered.

     Treat on a 5-7 day  schedule and check mature fruit for fruitworms.  Since
fruitworm injury is often relatively light it  is advisable to select 100 or more
fruit/plot.  Harding  (1971)  sampled 200 fruit/plot while  Shorey and Hill (1963)
checked over 2000  tomatoes/plot.


     Fruitworms may destroy  young  tomatoes.  If this situation exists, count the
total number of infested fruit/10-25 or more plants/plot  and remove the small,
infested tomatoes  as  they are  observed.

     Take yield records  and  record both worm-free and infested fruit from entire
plot or representative area  therefrom  and convert yields  to metric tons/ha or
tons/acre.
Colorado Potato  Beetle, Leptinotarsa. decemlineata  (Say)

     Tomatoes  are not favorite host plants  of  the  Colorado potato beetle,
Leptinotarsa deoemlineata (Say),  but  suffer extensive  damage  in certain areas,
especially  in  the South where the tomatoes  are often transplanted or seeded before
the  potatoes emerge.   The hungry  overwintered  beetles  seek out the young tomato
plants  and  feed  and lay eggs.  Later,  about the time the  tomatoes mature, the
potatoes are harvested and the beetles,  forced to  seek food elsewhere, often feed
on the  tomato  fruits  and  foliage.


     Sampling;—Count the number  of potato  beetle  larvae  or adults/10-25 plants.
Observe fruits at harvest for feeding  injury.   Take yields from entire plot or
representative area therefrom and convert  to metric tons/ha or tons/acre.
 Potato  Flea  Beetle,  Epitrix eucimeris (Harris)

     Overwintered  potato flea beetles,  Epitrix  auGumeris  (Harris), are often
 present at tomato  transplanting or direct seeding as  in  the  case  of  the potato
 beetle.   Flea  beetle damage by both adults to foliage and larvae  to  roots can be
 very severe  and  actually kill the transplants or  direct  seeded  tomatoes.  Direct
 seeded  tomatoes  are  especially vulnerable and plantings  may  be  completely destroyed
 in  several days.


     Sampling:—Select  at least 25 leaves/plot  and count the flea beetle feeding
 scars thereon, using the same technique as described  by  Hofmaster et al. (1967).

-------
                                     -112-
     In direct seeded tomatoes, count the number of injured plants/10-25 samples/
0.305 m (1 ft.) of row.   Stand counts may be needed where infestations are severe.
If the plants have several leaflets, it may be possible to check feeding scars on
100 or more leaflets/plot.  On calm days, actual counts of beetles/10-25 samples of
0.305 m (1 ft.) of row may be possible.  Use of a special sampling cage similar to
the one developed by Hills (1933^ will be helpful.


     Take yields from the entire plot or representative areas and convert to
metric tons/ha or tons/acre.
Aphids

     Aphids seldom kill tomato plants but often stunt them and injure the fruit
clusters so that yields are reduced.  The potato aphid, Macrosiphwn euphorblae
(Thomas), is the most common species.  Aphids also transmit virus diseases of
tomato.


     Sampling:—Select at least 25 leaves or terminals from as many different plants/
plot and count the aphids.

     Take yields records; check fruit and plants for virus disease at this time.
Records may be taken from entire plot or representative section; convert to metric
tons/ha or tons/acre.


                              References

Creighton, C.S., T.L. McFadden, and R.B. Cuthbert.  1971.  Control of Caterpillars
     on tomatoes with chemicals and pathogens.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  64(3):737-739.

Creighton, C.S., T.L. McFadden, and R.B. Cuthbert.  1973.  Tomato fruitworm:
     Control in South Carolina with chemical and microbial insecticides  1970-1971.
    J. Econ. Entomol.  66(2):473-475.

Hills, Orin A.  1933.  A new method for collecting samples of insect populations.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  26(4):906-910.

Harding, J.A.  1971.  Field comparisons of insecticidal sprays for control of four
     tomato insects in south Texas.  J. Econ. Entomol.  64(5):1302-1304.

Hofmaster, R.N., R.L. Waterfield, and J.C. Boyd.  1967-  Insecticides applied to
     the soil for the control of eight species of insects on  Irish potatoes  in
     Virginia.  J. Econ. Entomol.  60(5):1311-1318.

Middlekauf, W.W., C.Q. Gonzales, and R.C. King.  1963.  Effect of various insecti-
     cides in the control of caterpillars attacking tomatoes  in  California.  J.
     Econ. Entomol.  56(2):155-158.

Shorey, H.H., and I.M. Hall.  1963.  Toxicity of chemical and microbial  insecticides
     to pests and beneficial insects on poled tomatoes.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     56(6) .-813-817.

-------
                                     -113-
                    TOMATOES, POLED (Fresh Market)
Tomato Fruitworm, Heliothis zea (Boddie) and Tomato Pinworm, Keiferia lycoper sicella
(Busck)

     The following test methodology to determine the efficacy of insecticides to
control tomato fruitworm and tomato pinworm on tomatoes is very similar to the
method described under Cruciferae and Head Lettuce - Aphids and Thrips.  Only the
modifications of that method are noted below.


    M  Crop  and Location of Tests:—For the very early tests that involve "screen-
 ing"  only, plots can be 3 rows wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.)  long.   However,  as  the
 compounds  are tested past the initial screening stage,  larger plots  are recommended.
 Plots 4-8  rows wide by 15.2 m (50 ft.) long should be  large enough  to  prevent  the
 normal movement of adult moths from unduly influencing the results  between  plots
 under normal fruitworm and pinworm pressure.

      Since most commercial ground applicators treat 4  rows per swath,  plots  to  test
 commercial growing applications of insecticides should be 8 rows wide  by  30.5 m
 (100  ft.)  long.   The length to be long enough to harvest  a representative sample of
 fruit.
      Application and Equipment:—Hy-Boy type spray equipment with vertical  booms
 on each side of each plant row using 3-5 nozzles (depending on the height of  the
 tomato plants)  on each boom would provide good coverage when using ground equipment.
 Air application equipment should be commercially acceptable.

      The finished spray volume per acre would be dependent on size of  tomato  plants.
 When foliar spray is applied by small hand or large ground equipment,  378.5-757.0
 liters/ha (100-200 gals/acre) will give satisfactory results.  When foliar  spray
 is applied by air, 56.8-75.7 liters/ha (15-20 gals./acre)  will give satisfactory
 results.

      The time of application should be when small tomatoes first appear on  the vine.

      Since the  control of the tomato fruitworm and the tomato pinworm require
 preventive type treatments, the applications should be applied every 10-12  days
 until harvest,  making sure to observe the waiting period from the last application
 to the harvest  when using registered standard materials.  The interval between
 applications is dependent upon the area in which the test is conducted.    When
 feasible more than one time interval between applications should be evaluated.


      Sampling:—Since poled tomatoes (fresh market) are harvested over a period
 of several weeks, the sampling of the fruit for examination should be when there
 are enough harvestable fruit to get a representative sample.  Select tomatoes at
 random over a wide area of the plot so that a representative sample can be taken,
 but at all times keeping within a well buffered zone.

-------
                                     -114-

     Small screening hand plots that are 3 rows wide by 7.6 m (25 ft.) long should
have a fruit selection area one bed wide and 1.5 m (5 ft.) from the end of each
plot.  This method would provide a 2 row buffer zone on each side of each plot.

     Ground plots that are 4-8 rows wide by 15.2-30.5 m (50-100 ft.) long should
have a fruit selection area from the middle 2-4 rows and 10-20 ft. away from the
end of each plot.  This method would provide a 2-4 row buffer zone on each side of
each plot.

     Air plots that are 36.6 m (120 ft.) wide by 182.9 m (600 ft.) long should have
a fruit selection area 12.2 m (40 ft.) wide (middle one-third) and 30.5 m-45.7 m
(100-150 ft.) away from the end of each plot.  This method would provide a 24.4 m
(80 ft.) buffer zone on each side of each plot.

      A total  number  of  350-400 marketable  tomatoes  is  selected at  random  per
 each pesticide treatment,  regardless  of the number of plots.

      Each tomato should  be examined  and recorded as  damaged  if found  to have a
 fruitworm or pinworm  larva,  or  if  only  the  damage  is present  on the fruit.
 Extreme care should be taken to be sure that  the damage is caused by  the fruitworm
 or pinworm.    Normally one hole caused  by one  larvae is enough to grade the tomato
 down or discard it  as a  "cull", so normally the number  of holes or  larvae  per
 tomato are not significant enough  to  record unless "severity  of infestation" type
 data is requested.  The  total number  of tomatoes infested is  recorded as well  as
 the percent tomatoes  infested.

      Plants in plots  treated with  any new pesticide  being  tested  should be examined
 at least once to determine if there is  any  detrimental  effect on  yield.  This  is
 especially important  when the pesticide is  applied during the early stages  of
 plant development,  such as when there are many blossoms on the vine.  All  tomatoes
 in a given area of  the central  part  of  the  plot should  be harvested.  Marketable
 tomatoes should be  harvested in commercial  field boxes, and  that  number converted
 to "boxes yield per ha (acre)".  Because poled tomatoes are  harvested several
 times, it is recommended that more than one harvest  be  made  for the yield  records.


                              References

 Creighton, C.S.,  T.L. McFadden, and  R.B. Cuthbert.   1971.  Control  of caterpillars
      on tomatoes with chemicals and pathogens.  J. Eoon. Entomol.   64(3):737-739.

 Creighton, C.S.,  T.L. McFadden, and R.B. Cuthbert.   1973.  Tomato fruitworm:
      Control in South Carolina with chemical  and microbial insecticides.   J. Eoon.
      Entomol.   66(2):473-475.

 Hale, R.L.  1967-1973.  Annual reports  on file with  the Entomology  Department,
      University of  California,  Riverside, California.

 Hale, R.L.  1973-1974.  Unpublished data.

 Middlekauf, W.W., C.Q. Gonzales,  and R.C. King.   1963.  Effect  of various  insecticides
      in the control of caterpillars attacking tomatoes  in California.   J.  Eoon.
      Entomol.   56 (2):155-158.

 Shorey, H.H.,  and R.L. Hale.  1963.   Toxicity of  chemical and microbial insecticides
      to pest and beneficial insects on  poled tomatoes.  J. Eoon.  Entomol.
      56(6):813-817.

-------
                                   -115-
                        GPEENHOUSE VEGETABLES
     Greenhouse vegetables are important high value crops in many states.
Tomatoes are most widely grown: lesser crops are lettuce, cucumber, radish,
cress, endive and several other vegetables.  These crops are often rotated
such as tomatoes in fall and spring, with lettuce as a winter crop.  Spring
crops of vegetable plants and ornamental or bedding plants are grown by
some operators.  A fall crop of tomatoes is grown on some vegetable farms
where the greenhouses are used in late winter and spring for growing vege-
table seedlings for early spring field plantings.

     Approximately 30 species or groups of closely related species of insects,
mites, slugs, snails, sowbugs, and symphylans feed on foliage or fruits, stems
and roots, or destroy the seedlings    (Smith 1959).

     The pesticides for use on greenhouse vegetables are applied in several
ways:

     Sprays  Equipment for applying liquid sprays varies from knapsack
sprayers for spot spraying or in small greenhouses, to small portable power
sprayers for narrow aisles, to stationary pumps with extensive pipe or hose
lines.

     Low volume pesticides are applied with special equipment and special
formulations.

     Aerosols  Liquified gas propelled aerosols containing the dissolved
insecticide in methychloride with a mutual solvent when needed are released
with considerable turbulence (Smith et al. 1947, Smith and Lung 1948, Smith
1950).  Mechanical aerosols with insecticide in a volatile solvent are dis-
charged with equal turbulence by high velocity air streams from lightweight,
portable equipment including such machines as the Solo, Klip-On, Florafume
or Spacemaster foggers, Nicrogen and others (Johnson et al. 1965).  Thermo-
generated fogs produced from insecticides in special petroleum distillates
are discharged also with turbulence by such machines as Dyna-Fog Model "70"
or Flora-Fog (Snetsinger 1964).

     Fumigants  Toxic vapors from granular calcium cyanide scattered on aisle
surfaces or from released volatile pesticides (dichlorvos) through the poly-
ethylene tube ventilating system are further distributed by normal convection
currents from the heating system or turbulators  (Weigel 1926, Smith and Ota
1967).

     Smokes  Combustible powders containing the insecticide in a slow burning
mixture generate smoke with turbulence that becomes distributed throughout
the greenhouse.  Smokes are especially useful for treating small greenhouses.

-------
                                  -116-
     By methods outlined above, the greenhouse operator can program his  pest
management operations that require a minimum of time and maximum safety  to
operators and his high value crops (Fulton and Smith 1958) .  Minimum effective
dosages against the vulnerable stages of the pest are emphasized in most  con-
trol programs.  Pest control in greenhouses is largely dependent upon  chemi-
cals with vapor toxicity of short duration and minimum periods of residual
action which permit harvest with short waitinp periods (Fulton et al.  1950).
However, these vegetable crops are more sensitive to chemicals and to  tempera-
ture changes when grown in the greenhouse than when grown  in the field.   There-
fore, the greenhouse operator must recognize optimum conditions of light,
temperature and relative humidity for applying pesticides.

    In evaluating the efficacy of candidate pesticides for use on pests  affecting
greenhouse vegetables discussed in this report, the impact they may have  on
non-target species that may be included in integrated control programs should
be determined.
               Minor Pests of Greenhouse Vegetables
     At least 13 species of insects and related organisms sporadically damage
greenhouse vegetable crops on which they become established from neighboring
outdoor crops, ornamentals, or weedsr or they are introduced on infested
plants or other materials such as shipping containers.

     Test methods for obtaining data for these minor pest species listed below
have not been developed in this report.
     Broad mite
     Citrus mealybug
     Fungus gnat
     Garden fleahopper
     Grape mealybug
     Greenhouse thrips
     Mushroom mite
     Onion thrips
     Ringlegged earwig
     Sowbug
     Tomato russet mite
     White mold mite
     Wireworm
- Polyphagotarsonemus lotus (Banks)
- Planococcus c-itr-i (Risso)
- Lycor-ia inconstans (Fitch)
- Halticus bracteatus (Say)
- Pseudococcus mari-tinrus (Ehrhorn)
- Heliothrips haemorrhoidalis (Bouche)
- Tyrophagus lintneri. (Osb .)
- Thrips tabaci, (Lindeman)
- Euborellia annulipes (Lucas)
- Armad'ill'idu'm vul-gare (Latr.)
- Aculops lycopersici (Massee.)
- Er-iophyes cladop'bt'hirus  (Nalepa)
- Melanotus spp.
                             References

Fulton, R.A., and F.F. Smith.  1958.  Respiratory protective devices:
     Methods for testing them against pesticides.  Agric. Chem. Aug.  £•  Sent.

Fulton, R.A., F.F. Smith, and M.S. Konecky.  1950.  Comparative toxicity  of
     vapors of four organic phosphates to chrysanthemum  aphid  and  two-spotted
     spider mite.   J. Econ.  Entomol.  43:940-1.

Johnson, G.V., A.H. Yeomans, and F.F. Smith.  1965.  Mechanical aerosol
     applications in  greenhouses.  Flor.  Exc.  111(8):34-37, 60, 69.

-------
                                   -117-
Sleesman, J.P., and R.K. Lindquist.  1971.  Seek effective controls for green-
     house whitefly.  Greenhouse Veq. Res. Sunm. , Ohio Pep.  OAKDC ,  Wooster,
     Ohio.  56(3):35-37.

Smith, F.F.  1950.  Tetraethyl Dithiopyrophosphate in Aerosols for  Control of
    Greenhouse Insects,  USDA BEPQ Circular F- °m (Virneo) .
Smith, F.F.  1959.  Control of Insect Pests of Greenhouse Vegetables.  USDA
     Agric. Handbook #142.  25pp.

Smith, F.F., R.A. Fulton, P.H. Lung, and P. Brierley.  1947.  Potent new
     insecticide and new method undergo thorough trial. Flor.  Pev.
     99(2569) : 31-35.  Feb. 20.

Smith, F.F., P.P. Lung, and R.A. Fulton.  194P .  Parathion in Aerosols for
     the Control of pests on Greenhouse Plants.  U?DA BEOP Circular E-75Q
     (mimeo) .

Smith, F.F., and A.K. Ota.  1967.  Control of  insects in a greenhouse
     equipped with a polyethylene  tube ventilating system.  FToT.  P&v .
     140(3636) ;11, 68.  Aug. 3.

Smith, F.F., A.K. Ota, and A.L. Boswell.  1970.  Insecticides for control of
     the greenhouse whitefly.  J.  Econ. Entomol.  63:522-27.

Snetsinger, R.  1964.  Pesticide application in the greenhouse.  (Reprinted)
     Suffolk Country Farm News. May, p. 32.  (New York).

Weigel, C.A.  197.6.  Calcium Cyanide as a Fumigant for Ornamental Greenhouse
     Plants.  USDA Dept. Circular  380, 16 pp.
     At least four species of aphids are commonly found on greenhouse vegetables.
The foxglove aphid Acyrthosiphon solani  (Kltb.), green peach aphid Myzus persicae
(Sulzer) , melon aphid Aphis gosspyii Glover, and potato aphid MacrosipPvw
euphorbiae (Thomas) cause stunting and curling of new growth, yellowing and
death of older leaves.  Fruits and foliage become coated with honeydew followed
by black sooty mold.  In addition, aphids transmit cucumber mosaic virus to
tomatoes and cucumbers.

     Aphids are readily controlled with soil systemics, also with aerosols,
smokes, fumigants., or sprays on most crops except on dense foliage of lettuce
or cucumbers.  To be effective, early season control is important.


     Crop and Location:—Plants of cucumber, lettuce, tomato, cress, or
radish are grown in 10 cm (4 in.) pots or larger containers and infested with
desired species of aphid from test colony.

     For the tests, use vigorous aphid colonies, composed predominately of
apterous nymphs and adults and free of parasites, predators, and fungus
infections that would confound the results.

-------
                                  -118-
     Experimental Design:—Groups of 4 or more plants, each of desired test
crops and desired aphid species, may be used for systemics applied to the soil,
for sprays applied with knapsack sprayer, or for spacing among other plants in
greenhouse units 28.3 m^ (1000 ft.3) or larger houses for testing aerosols,
mists, combustible powders or smokes, and fumigants.

     Each formulation should be compared with a standard formulation of known
performance and with an untreated control.

     After minimum effective treatment has been established, make series of
applications with natural infestations in commercial greenhouses: place pots
of infected test plants at intervals to determine efficiency of control and
effect on crop.

     See Leafminers for other details.
     Application and Equipment:—See statement under Leafminers.
     Sampling:—Make 24-hour posttreatment count of dead or moribund aphids
that drop from plants onto papers placed beneath the pots before treatment,
also those that lodge on plant parts.  Make 1-day and 3-day count for
survivors.

     In naturally infested commercial crop, make 1-day and 3-day counts
posttreatment for mortality.  Make counts at 7 day intervals for buildup of
population to determine need for retreatment.

     Record observations on host plant reaction such as tip burn on lettuce,
chlorosis or flower bud abscission on cucumber or tomato following treatment,


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.


                              Reference

Smith, F.F. 1962.  Control of Insect Pests of Vegetables,  USDA Agric.
     Handbook #142.  25 pp.
Beetles

     Spotted cucumber beetles, D-idbrot-ica unidecimpunctata howardi Barber, and
striped cucumber beetles, Acalyrma wittata  (Fabricius) , damage outdoor crops
and enter the greenhouse in spring and autumn.  The.v feed on stems and foliape
of cucumber and infect plants with bacterial wilt; they also attack  tomato and
lettuce.

     Several species of flea beetles, but especially potato flea beetles,
Epitri.x cucumer-is  (Harr.) , enter greenhouses in spring and fall and damage
young tomato plants.

-------
                                   -119-
        D an  Location:—These pests as adult beetles are sporadic invaders on
     ,	—	  "   ^ i»•— u i_ r t-> ^- o CLO ava. *_j. _i_ L- LJCC^I	LCO CLJ_C_ oL'^'-i-ci.^i.j^^^ j_iiv
greenhouse vegetable crops and normally do not breed on them.  Control
 esigned for treating entire greenhouses are therefore essential.
measures
                       n1--If a screening program for new chemicals is desired,
follow procedures for rearing and  testing insects under Leaf Eating Caterpillars.

     For tests with  sprays,  select randomly  located groups of 20-30 cucumber
or tomato plants or  comparable areas  of  cucumber, lettuce, or tomato seedlings
that are being damaged by  one or more of these pests .

     For tests with  aerosols or fumigants, select units of 28.3 m3  (1000 ft.3)
or commercial greenhouses.

     Include untreated control and a  treatment with test chemical of known
performance as a standard  for effectiveness.


     Application and Equipment:—See  Leaf  Eating  Caterpillars.


     Sampling:—Make pretreatment  counts of  adults present in 3 or more randomly
located groups of plants  in infested  greenhouses.

     To obtain information on mortality  of beetles in  treated areas, place
sheets of paper or polyethylene under groups of plants before treatment.
Make 24 hour posttreatment count of living beetles that are  present on the
plants and record those dropping onto sheets and  record on basis  of m2
(10.8 ft. 2).  The dead beetles  on  sheets may not  reveal total mortality since
insects may disperse for  various distances before they succumb.

     Make insect injury ratings of 1-5 on  seedling tomatoes  or  other affected
hosts 24 hours posttreatment.   Fully  describe leaf damage  such  as seedlings
with injured leaves  and cucumber plants  with gouged  stems.

     Record host plant injury following  application  of  test  material  1 day
and 7 days posttreatment,  including  foliage  injury  such as  chlorosis,
marginal burn, also  flower bud  abscission  on tomatoes  and  cucumbers.


     Analysis and Reporting of  Data:—See  statement  under  Leafminers.
                               Eeference

 Smith, F.F.   1959.   Control of Insect Pests of Greenhouse Vegetables.
     USDA Agric.  Handbook  /f!42.  25 pp.
Cutworms

      Several  species of cutworms including the black cutworm Agrotis ip si-Ion
 (Hufnagel) , variegated cutworm Peridroma sauaia (Hubner) , and the dingv cutworm

-------
                                  -120-
Feltia subgothica (Haw.) attack lettuce, cucumbers, tomatoes, and cress,
especially in the seedling stage.  The variegated cutworm and others known
as climbing cutworms also climb older plants and feed on leaves, buds, and
fruit.  All hide in the soil or mulch during the day and feed at night.  In
the greenhouse, adults and young larvae have been controlled by aerosols
containing parathion or malathion.  Baits containing bran, molasses, sometimes
other ingredients, and a toxicant are effective against older cutworm larvae.


     Crop and Location:—For tests in greenhouses with cutworm infestations
on lettuce, tomato, cucumber, or cress, select plots of adequate size to reduce
influence of larval dispersal from contiguous plots.


     Experimental Design:—If facilities are available, cutworm larvae may be
reared and released in plots 1 or 2 days before treatment.  See Leaf Eating
Caterpillars for rearing methods.

     All treatments should be replicated 3 or more times for evaluation of
results.  Also include an untreated control and a treatment with test chemical
of known performance as a standard for effectiveness.


     Application and Equipment:—For application of aerosols, fumigants , or
ground sprays, see this section under Leaf Eating Caterpillars.

     Bran baits prepared with or without molasses and with the test compound
as toxicant are broadcasted late in the afternoon at rate of 11.2 to 22.4 kg/ha
(10 to 20 Ib/A) (Metcalf et al. 1962).  It should not be scattered on the
plants but directed to the ground.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of dead larvae found in soil depressions
around the base of injured plants.

     Make counts of cutworm-injured plants at 1 and 7 days posttreatment.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.


                              Reference

Metcalf, C.L., W.P. Flint, and R.L. Metcalf.  1962.  Destructive and Useful
Insects.  McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.  1083 pp.
Garden Symphylan

     The garden symphylan Scutigerella immaculate. (Newport) is a widespread
pest of vegetable crops, fruits, and ornamentals in 25 states and occurs both
in greenhouses and out-of-doors.  High soil temperatures in southern states

-------
                                  -121-
pest ri-rr soils in areas of low rainfall limit even wider distribution of this
AT,,*-' i_ rri8ation of dry-land areas promotes further distribution of this pest
(Waterhouse 1910}
 -,    . 1S  ng infestations in greenhouses are usually suppressed by pre-
     ing soil fumigations with ethylene dibromide or D-D mixture as used for
nematode control of soil sterilization with steam or hot water, but these
of effe  '      When the symphylans penetrate to soil depths below the zone
o  e  ective treatment or they migrate from untreated areas through drainage
tiles, gravelly soil, or earthworm tunnels.  They survive by feeding on organic
matter trom manure or decaying vegetable matter between crops.  For reproduc-
1966)    £Ver' they req-uire living plant roots of the growing crop (Shanks


     Plants injured by symphylans are stunted, grow slowly or die due to the
severe pruning of the root system.  Soil drenches with lindane have been an
effective supplementary post-planting treatment in greenhouses on both
vegetables and ornamentals.

     Field experiments have demonstrated that certain chemicals are highly
effective in protecting crops from symphylan damage.  These chemicals seem
worthy of testing for effectiveness-cm vegetable crops in the greenhouse.

     Complete control of symphylans for 18 weeks in Oregon resulted from soil
treatments or by dipping bare roots and stems of broccoli plants being trans-
planted to the field  (Berry and Crowell 1970).  In Pennsylvania applications
in the row or broadcast resulted in protection of corn and beans for 62 days
(Gesell and Hower 1973).

     Since natural infestations in greenhouses tend to be localized and
populations vary, performance data may not be readily obtained.  Ramsey  (1971)
proposed the desirability of artificially  infesting experimental plots and
outlined a procedure for mass rearing symphylans.

     Rearing colonies of garden symphylans can be accomplished by placing 20
adults in a .947 liter (1 quart) glass canning jar with 2.5 cm  (1 in.) of
gravel in the bottom and loosely filled with  soil at 25% soil moisture and
held at 21.1°C (70°F).  Fresh carrot roots are supplied twice weekly as  food
(Shanks 1966).  In later studies, Berry  (1972) used ground hemlock bark  at
30% moisture and temperature  of 24°C (75.2°F).  By supplying both lettuce
leaves and carrot roots as food, he obtained  20 fold increase in 6 months.
Portions of the media containing symphylans are distributed among the plots
(Ramsey 1971).


     Crop and Location:—Young tomato, cucumber, or lettuce plants should be
set in infested areas in the greenhouse.  Radish and cress should be seeded.
Plots of tomatoes and cucumbers should be  3 rows wide and  5 m (16.4  ft.)  long.
Plots of lettuce, radish, and cress should be of comparable size.


     Experimental Design:—Symphylan populations already present may be
supplemented from reared colonies to insure a uniform infestation.  Allow
several days time for symphylans to become distributed before treatments are
applied.  Each series of tests should be replicated 4 or more times  in random-
ized block design.  A known effective treatment as a standard and an untreated
check should be included for comparison with  candidate materials.

-------
                                  -122-
     Application and Equipment:—Dipping roots of transplants can be done at
time of setting plants in the growing sections of greenhouses.  Measured
quantities of drenches can be applied to the soil at the base of each plant
after they have been transplanted from pots to greenhouse beds, or in a
furrow beside the plants made with a wheel hoe.  Granules can be applied in
the furrow for band treatments with a hand shaker.  Broadcast treatments on
small plots can be made with a hand shaker and to larger plots with equipment
generally available for applying measured quantities of granules or powders
to agricultural crops.  The granules can be incorporated in the soil with a
garden rotary cultivator (Gesell and Hower 1973) .


     Sampling^—Make uniform soil samplings: 2 or more per plot, to a depth of
20.32 cm (8 in.) to include part of the root zone of the growing plants and
record the living symphylans in the sample by visual examination or more
accurately by flotation of symphylans by stirring the soil sample in water.
Pretreatment samplings should be made in each plot.  Make weekly samplings
posttreatment to determine the residual effectiveness of the treatment.

     Make observations on growth effects of symphylan damage on the crop and
differentiate from damage due to chemical treatments.

     Take yield data of harvested crops.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.


                              References

Berry, R.E.  1972.  Garden symphylan: reproduction  and development in the
     laboratory.  J. Boon.  Entomol.   65:1628-32.

Berry. R.E., and H.H. Crowell.  1970.  Effectiveness of Bay 37289 as a
     transplant dip to control the garden symphylan in broccoli.   J.  Fcon.
     Entomol.  63:1718-19.

Gesell, S.S., and A.A. Hower.  1973.  Garden symphylan:  comparison to row
     and broadcast application of granular insecticides for control.  J.
     Econ.  Entomol.  66:822-23.

Ramsey, H.L.  1971.  Garden symphylan populations in laboratory cultures.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  64:657-60.

Shanks, C.H.  1966.  Factors that affect reproduction of the garden symphylan,
     Scutigerella -immaculata.  J. Eoon. Entomol.  59:1403-06.

Waterhouse, J.S.  1970.  Distribution of the garden symphylan, Scutigevella
     i-mmaculata, in the United States-a 15-year survey.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     63:390-94.

-------
                                  -123-
GreenhouE
         greenhouse whitefly Trialeurodes vaporariomm (Westwood) is
          the most serious pest of greenhouse vegetables and ornamental
crops  and is established in greenhouses throughout the United States.
inis wnitefly does not survive the winter out-of-doors in cold climates
uuc it breeds during the summer on vegetables in commercial fields and home
gardens including squash, potatoes and tomatoes, also on numerous ornamentals
and weeds.  It is being distributed on vegetable and ornamental plants
from greenhouses and garden centers.  Flying adults reinfest greenhouse
crops in the fall.  Greenhouse cucumbers and tomatoes are most seriously
infested because of the higher temperatures at which they are grown: but
lettuce, radishes, and cress are also infested.

     Infested foliage becomes yellowish-green and the plants are stunted from
whitefly feeding on plant sap.  Foliage and fruits are often blackened by
sooty fungus that grows on the honeydew secreted by the adults and nymphs.
Reduction in yields of tomatoes results from sooty mold fungus that grows on
honeydew deposits, also by direct feeding damage on the foliage (Lindquist
et al. 1972).

     At normal temperatures for growing greenhouse tomatoes, the life cycle
from egg laying to adult is about 35 days - eggs, 11-12 days: first nymphal
stage, 2-4 days: second, third and fourth nymphal stages, 4 days each: and
quiescent pupal stage about 9 days.  Adults mate and begin laying eggs within
20 to 40 hours and continue to lay eggs daily for 30 to 40 days.

     The motility of adults and their daily reproduction over several weeks
results in infestations in all stages of the insect on the same plant.

    Successful control of greenhouse whitefly has been dependent upon regularly
timed applications of the most widely used insecticides that kill the adults,
the newly hatched motile nymphs in the first instar and the sessile nymphs
in the second instar.  Nymphs in the third and  fourth instars are more resis-
tant than younger nymphs, the pupae are highly  resistant, and the eggs are little
affected by most registered chemicals  (Gentile  1972, Krueger et al. 1973,
Smith et al. 1970, Webb et al. 1974).


     Crop and Location: — For the preliminary tests to obtain data on mortality
of various whitefly stadia, all plants should be grown under isolation before
and after infestation and treatment .

     Select a variety of tomato or cucumber commonly grown in commercial
greenhouses.  For preliminary tests, an excellent host plant is  the Henderson
bush lima bean, seedlings of which are easily grown: adult whiteflies readily
oviposit on the primary leaves, and the nymphs  and pupae are uniformly exposed
for treatment and examination (Smith et al . 1970, Webb et al . 1974).

     For soil applications of chemicals with systemic action and  certain fumi-
gants or aerosols (mechanical, liquified gas, or thermal), circumstances may
make it necessary to conduct a series of applications on mixed populations  in
larger greenhouse units: or infested plants with whiteflies of known  age can be
placed at intervals throughout the compartment  or experimental greenhouse unit.

-------
                                  -124-
     Experimental Design:—Groups of infested plants with 25 to 50 insects
per leaf and in desired developmental stage or age group should be replicated
three or more times for each material and dosage rate.  Each series of tests
should include comparable groups of plants that receive (a) a known effective
treatment as a standard and- (b) no treatment.  Treated and untreated groups of
plants should be isolated to prevent posttreatment reinfestation.


     Application and Equipment:—To obtain whitefly nymphs of known age and
development, expose groups of plants successively for 2-8 hours to caged
ovipositing adults.  Continue to expose other groups at 2-3 day intervals until
all stages are represented in the series.  Avoid excessive egg deposition by
prolonged exposure to adults and later overcrowding of nymphs, which lead to
high mortality in checks.  Kill adults remaining on plants after exposure
using dichlorvos vapors (Smith 1970, Webb et al. 1974) and reisolate plants
until time for treatment.

     Sprays may be applied with 7.5 liter (2 gal.) compressed air sprayer
operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm^ (30-60 psi) and wetting both upper and lower leaf
surfaces.  Also, uniform coverage can be assured by dipping plants in the spray
formulation.

     Greenhouse compartments of 28.3 m^ (1000 ft. ) or larger are needed for
testing materials in gas propelled aerosols using methyl chloride as propellent,
mechanical aerosols with methylene chloride or other volatile solvent,
microgenerators using appropriate formulations of test material, or fumigants
such as granular calcium cyanide, also resin strips or other materials as
corn cobs impregnated with dichlorvos (Smith et al. 1970).

     Soil treatments with systemic insecticides - see statement under Leafminers,


     Sampling:--Samplings to determine mortality of immature stages are made
at 7 and 14 days posttreatment.  Ten or more leaf discs, 1 cm (0.394 in.)
diameter, cut with leaf punch or cork borer (Smith et al. 1970), entire
leaflets, or half leaves (Webb et al. 1974, Krueger et al. 1973) are collected
at the same relative position on treated and untreated plants.  Examinations
should be made with microscope and illumination so that dead and living nymphs
can be differentiated.  From 100 to 200 or more individuals should be included
in sample counts from each treatment.

     Mortality of adults on plants treated in plots on the growing crop can
be made by leaf counts before and after treatment and by dead adults on
squares of black paper placed beneath the plants at time of treatment (Smith
et al. 1970, Webb et al. 1974).  Mortality of immature stadia by leaf disc
or leaflet samples can also be made on the growing crop after a series of
scheduled applications have been made (Smith et al. 1970).


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.

-------
                                  -125-
                             References
Gentile  A r   1070   A      -,
           •<-•  iy/2.  An  evaluation of SBP 1382 for the control of whiteflies
     on poinsettia.  FZor>. Rev.  April 13, 19-20.

Llndauist  R.K., T.T.L. Bauerle, and R.R. Spadafora.  1972.   Effect of the
     65^1406-08         y  °n  ylelds of  greenhouse  tomatoes.  J.  Econ.  Entomcl-


Krueger, H.R., R.K. Lindquist, J.F. Mason, and R.R. Spadafora. 1973.   Application
     of methomyl to greenhouse tomatoes:   greenhouse whitefly control and
     residues in foliage  and fruits.   J. Econ. Entomol.  66:1223-24.

Smith, F.F., A.K. Ota,  and A.L. Boswell.   1970.   Insecticides for control
     of the  greenhouse  whitefly.  J. Econ. Entomol.  63:522-27.

Webb, R.E.,^F.F. Smith, A.L.  Boswell,  E.S. Fields, and R.M. Waters.   1974.
     Insecticidal control of the  greenhouse  whitefly on greenhouse ornamentals
     and vegetable  plants.   J. Econ. Entomol.  67:114-118.
Leafminer

     The vegetable leafminer  (Liriomysa  sp.) which has been identified as
L. rmnda Frick  (Smith et al.  1962)  or L.  sativae Blanchard (Lindquist and
Krueger 1975) is a major pest of  ornamentals,  lettuce, tomatoes and cucumbers
in northern greenhouses.  The same  species  or  closely related species damage
greenhouse crops in many states.  This vegetable leafminer was probably in-
troduced into northern greenhouses  from  the Gulf States or California and
was distributed on chrysanthemums or other  ornamentals.  Its wide host range
includes a large number of vegetable crops, ornamentals and weeds.  It does
not survive the cold winters  in the north but  breeds throughout the year in
greenhouses.  Leafminers infest nearby outdoor crops during the summer, then
return to new greenhouse crops in the autumn.

     Leafminer injury consists of small  stippled spots or punctures in young
leaves caused by the female ovipositor.   The oozing droplets of sap supply food
for both males and females.   The  more conspicuous injury, however, is the
serpentine mines caused by feeding  larvae from eggs deposited in  older leaves.
A single larval mine per tomato leaflet  causes a measurable reduction in yield
(Wolfenbarger and Wolfenbarger 1958).

     In most field experiments (Wolfenbarger 1958), insecticides  have been
evaluated on the decrease in  numbers of  mines  in treated plots.   Contact or
residual activity of the insecticides on adults, eggs and larvae  were not
differentiated.  Tests for control  of pupae in the soil have not  been successful.

     For leafminer control on greenhouse crops, it is essential to establish
minimum effective dosage rate and treating  schedule by testing the insecticide
against eggs and larvae of known  age (Smith et al. 1974).  Intervals between
applications of 5 or 7 to 8 days  will depend upon  (1) residual action of test
compound, (2) controlling the larva while young and before it has caused
extensive damage, and (3) greenhouse temperatures that affect the developmental
rate of the leafminer.

-------
                                  -126-
     Crop and Location:—Select a susceptible variety of host crop plant for
initial tests; also Henderson bush lima bean (Phaseolus lunatus} may be used
since it is easily grown and supports high populations of larvae in primary
leaves (Webb and Smith 1970).   Uniform infestations can be obtained in groups
of plants by exposing them to adults in a rotating exposure cage (Smith et
al. 1970).  Test plants should be grown in containers so that groups of plants
with different aged insects can be moved to:  (1) sites for precision spraying,
or (2) to greenhouses for treatment with sprays, aerosols or fumigants, and
(3) to isolated greenhouse units or growing areas to prevent posttreatment
reinfestation.  If circumstances make it necessary to select test plants from
randomly infested plants in a commercial greenhouse, the leaves containing
larvae in an early stage of development should be tagged and observed for
results after treatment (Lindquist et al.  1973,  Lindquist and Krueger 1975).


     Experimental Design:—Groups of four or more pots of plants containing a
total of 100 or more leafminers in each age group should be treated as a unit
for each dosage level and within the range of greenhouse temperatures required
for commercial  production of the crop or crops  involved.  Three or more
replications per treatment are desirable for evaluation of results.

     When the minimum effective dosage has been established, make tests for
phytotoxicity on host crops at increased dosage  (up to 2X) at the normal
temperature  and also at 5°C (9°F) elevated temperature.

     Follow requirements of greenhouse culture by making treatments during
periods of daylight or darkness to avoid undue plant stress (water loss and
wilting or leaf burn from high  temperatures).   Observe requirements for
closing and opening ventilators for releasing insecticide vapors and control-
ling the temperature.


     Application and Equipment:—

     Foliage Application - Depending upon the test chemical and the formulation,
applications can be made with knapsack sprayers  operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm?-
(30-60 psi) and delivering 187.1-935.4 liters/ha (20-100 gallons of water/acre).

     Sprays should be applied to both upper and  lower leaf surfaces.  For
treating larger plots on the growing crops in greenhouses are specially designed
equipment that includes power sprayers, micronizers, backpack mist blowers,
mechanical aerosol machines, thermogenerators for fogs or liquefied gas
aerosols in special containers, and nozzles for  release and distribution in the
greenhouse or through polytube ventilating systems.  The test chemical should be
incorporated in formulations required for efficient performance in any of these
machines.  The nature of the chemical may make it adaptable for use in some
machines but not others.  For example, chemicals for use in liquefied gas
aerosols must be soluble in the propellent gas or in a standard non-phytotoxic
solvent that blends with the propellent.

-------
                                   -127-
     ee1  Application ~ Systemic insecticides for control of leafminers in the
measure   °Uld be aPPlied as granules with a special applicator that accurately
195?  TS j   quantity desired for a given sized container or bed area (Smith
ujz., Lindquist and Bauerle 1972).
   HT-         lnsecticldes  in emulsions or solutions are applied to the soil
(I  ^o^Nat ^esi§nated dosages  for various sized containers or bench areas
^mitn 1V02;, which will facilitate computation to kg/ha (Ib/acre) dosage rates.


_    Sampling:— Both  treated and untreated plants should be isolated from
infested crops to  prevent straying leafminer adults from ovipositing post-
treatment.  Mortality of leafminer larvae  in leaves of treated plants can be
determined by direct  examination.   Cessation of feeding and shriveling of
killed larvae can  be  observed under low magnification one day after treatment.
By examination of  foliage 4 to  7 days  after treatment, dead and living or
emerged larvae can be determined by appearance of the mines (Smith et al. 1962).
Dead larvae will be found in partially developed mines.  Living larvae occur
in more fully developed mines or they  will have emerged and pupated at the 7-day
count.


     Analysis and. Reporting of  Data: — Data should be compared using a valid
statistical test  for  significance  such as  Duncan's new multiple-range test.

     Treatment performance  should  be compared with untreated checks and one
or more highly effective insecticides  that have been reported in  literature
or accepted as standard for commercial control.


                             References

Lindquist, R.K., and  W.L. Bauerle. 1972.  Evaluation  of  granular insecticides
     for control of leafminers  and whiteflies  on  greenhouse tomato seedlings.
     Greenhouse Veg.  Res:   Res. Sumrn.  58.  OARDC, Wooster, Ohio.   April.

Lindquist, R.K., H.R.  Krueger ,  J.F. Mason, and R.R.  Spadafora.   1973.  Applica-
     tion of diazinon to greenhouse tomatoes:  vegetable  leafminer control and
     residues in foliage and fruits.   J. Econ. Entomol.   66:1001-2.

Lindquist, R.K., and  H.R. Krueger. 1975.  Application of acephate to
     greenhouse tomatoes :   external vs . internal  foliage  residues , and vegetable
     leafminer control.  J".  Econ.  Entomol.   68:122-3.

Smith  F.F.  1952.  Conversion  of  per  acre dosages  of  soil insecticide to
     equivalents  for  small  units.   J".  Econ. Entomol.   45:339-40.

Smith  F.F. , A.L.  Boswell,  and  H.E. Wave.  1962.  New  chrysanthemum leafminer
     species.  Flor.  Rev.   130:29-30.

Smith  F.F., R.E.  Webb, and A.L. Boswell.  1974.  Insecticidal  control of a
     vegetable leafminer.   J. Econ. Entomol.   67:108-10.

-------
                                   -128-
Smith, F.F., R.E. Webb, A.L. Boswell, and G.F. Combs. Jr.  1970.  A
     circular rotating cage for obtaining uniform oviposition by Liriomysa
     rrrunda in exposed plants.  J.  Fcon.  Entomol.   63:655-6.

Webb, R.E.. and F.F. Smith.  1970.   Fearing a leafminer Liriomyza rrrunda.
     J. Econ. Entomol.  63:2009-10.

Wolfenbarger, D.O.  1958.  Serpentine leafminer:   brief history and summary
     of a decade of control measures in South Florida.  J. Econ. Entomol.
     51:357-9.

Wolfenbarger, D.A., and D.O. Wolfenbarger.  1966.  Tomato yields and leafminer
     infestations and a sequential sampling plan for determining need for
     control treatments.  J. Econ. Entomol.   59:279-83.
Leaf Eating Caterpillars

     Several species of lepidopterous pests of field grown vegetable crops also
are annual threats to greenhouse vegetable crops, especially in the fall when
their moths enter the greenhouses and initiate infestations on lettuce, cucumbers,
and tomatoes as well as other vegetables and ornamentals.  It is well known that
the early developmental stages of armyworms, cabbage loopers, corn earworms,
and other lepidopterous pests are much more susceptible to insecticides than
are older larvae (Harris et al. 1975).  Early detection of infestations and
prompt treatment in greenhouse vegetable crops are important for efficient
control.  Control programs should be based on tests against one week old larvae
or, at the most, up to third instar larvae (Lindcmist 1972, Harris et al. 1975,
Smith 1959).  By applying the pesticide at minimal dosage rates and at regular
intervals against the susceptible younger larvae, possible phytotoxic effects
against the more tender greenhouse crops can be reduced.

     Since these pest species are also important pests of outdoor commercial
vegetable crops in many parts of the country, data on promising new materials
that result from field experiments should give leads to materials that may be
adaptable to greenhouse crops.

     Armyworms of several species, including the fall armyworm Pseudaleti-a
unipunctata (Haw.) and the yellow striped armywormProden-ia orn-ithogall-i Guen,
are fairly regular pests in fall crops of greenhouse vegetables.  Armyworm
moths enter the greenhouses in the fall.  Their larvae feed on cucumber, lettuce
and tomato.  They also chew out large areas in the side of foliage of tomato
fruits.

     In recent years the beet armyworm Spodopteva exi,gua  (Hbn.) has become an
increasingly serious pest on both vegetables and ornamentals in northern
greenhouses.  It has usually been introduced on cuttings  or plants from the
south.  Once established, the beet armyworm becomes a persistent pest, since it
is less readily controlled by available pesticides than are the other above-
named armyworms.  If not controlled, beet armyworms continue to breed and damage
crops throughout the winter.

-------
                                  -129-
      "1    flin  m°ths of the corn earworm or tomato fruit worm enter the
                    SUTnmer or earlY fall and lay their eggs on tomato foliage.
          larVae feed at first °n the foliage; later they cut small entrance
     s   r   fruits and devour the interior.  A single larva may damage several
conta'"'         of y°uni? larvae on the foliage has been accomplished with aerosols
effective8 Parathion and malathion (Smith 1959) .   Dichlorvos has also been
f 11   Th        lo°per Triefoplusia ni  (Hbn.) moths enter greenhouses in the
  11.
            insect is probably more widespread and the most generally serious
caterpillar pest of  greenhouse vegetables and ornamentals.  If uncontrolled, cab
bage loopers continue to breed on greenhouse crops throughout the winter.
Cabbage loopers feed on foliage of tomato, cucumber, cress and radishes and are
especially damaging  to lettuce where they are also most difficult to control.

    Prompt and regular applications of an effective insecticide are essential
since young larvae and the  adults of the above species are more readily
killed than older larvae by parathion, malathion or dichlorvos in aerosols
(Smith 1959, Harris  et al.  1975).


     Crop and Location: —Grow test plants of lettuce, tomato, cucumber or other
crops in 10-15 cm (4-6") pots in  isolation to prevent infestation by unwanted
pests.  To obtain caterpillars of each species, all of known age and in the same
stage of development, infest groups of plants with eggs from moths reared from
local infestations or captured in black  lights  (Harris et al. 1975).  Hold
eggs for hatching and rearing to  one week old larvae  (Lindquist 1972) .  Harris
et al. (1975) used a more precise test method by rearing larvae to the third
instar and transferring known numbers to plants one day before applying the test
insecticide .
     Experimental Design:—For  the  initial  tests, groups of four or more pots
of plants containing a  total  of  50  or more  larvae in each age group should be
treated as a unit for each dosage level  and within  the range of greenhouse
temperatures required for production of  the crop involved.  Three or more
replications per treatment are  desirable for  evaluation of results.

     Include untreated  control  and  a treatment with test chemical of known
performance such as carbaryl  as  a standard  for effectiveness.


     Application and Equipment:—Sprays  should be utilized for  control of
localized infestations  of these  pests.   Knapsack sprayers operating at 2.1-4.2
kg/cm2 (30-60 psi) and  delivering 187.1-935.4 liters/ha  (20-100 gallons/acre)
are satisfactory for  the preliminary tests on groups of infested plants: also
for treating groups of  20-30  tomato or cucumber plants or comparable areas of
lettuce in growing crops.  For  application  of thermal, mechanical or gas
propelled aerosols or fumigants, individual compartments with volumes of  28.3
m^ (1000 ft. ) or more  would  be  required.   For these tests, which would precede
treatments in larger greenhouses, groups of plants  infested as  for preliminary
spray tests could be placed throughout the  compartment to provide infestations
for mortality counts.

-------
                                  -130-
     All tests should be conducted within temperature range required for
growth of the crop and at time of day or night when host plant injury might
be critical due to closing of ventilators.

     Since sick caterpillars usually drop from treated plants, sheets of poly-
ethylene or other material should be placed on the soil or mulched surface around
the plants before applying the test chemical.


     Sampling:—Make direct counts of 50 or more larvae from each replicate
(Lindquist 1972, Harris et al. 1975) in preliminary tests.  Select the time of
recording mortality according to speed of action of the test chemical.  Usually
the counts can be made in 24 "or 48 hour posttreatment.

     Make insect injury ratings of 1-5 or 1-10 on host plants and carefully
describe leaf damage such as percentage of leaf area destroyed or market
acceptability for each category.  Record number of injured and uninjured fruits
in treated and check plots.

     Take yield records of treated and untreated plots and take note of the
extent of feeding injury to marketable parts of the plants.

     Record host plant injury following application of test material, including
foliage injury such as chlorosis, marginal burn, and also flower bud
abscission on tomatoes  and cucumbers.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.


                             References

Hairis, C.R., H.J. Svec, S.A. Turnbull, and W.W. Sans.  1975.  Laboratory
     and field studies on the effectiveness of some insecticides in controlling
     the armyworm.  J. Econ. Entomol.  68:513-16.

Lindquist, R.K.  1972.  Bac-illus tnur-ingi.ens'ls formulations for cabbage looper
     control on greenhouse lettuce.  Greenhouse Veg. Res.:  Res. Swnrn.  58.
     OARDC, Wooster, Ohio.

Smith, F.F.  1959.  Control of Insects of Greenhouse Vegetables.  USDA
     Agric. Handbook #142.  25 pp.
Slugs and Snails

     Several species of slugs feed on foliage of many greenhouse plants  including
young tomatoes, cucumber, lettuce, radish, and cress.  Their injury  is recog-
nized by the ragged appearance of the foliage, gouged tomato fruits, and the
presence of slime tracks.  The most common species are the gray garden slug,
Deroceros reticulatwn  (Muller), gray field slug, D. laeve  (Fuller),  and  the
spotted garden slug, Limax maximus (Linne).  Slugs frequent damp places  and
especially under boards, flower pots, or under any debris.  Sanitation to remove
their hiding places is important in reducing populations.

-------
                                   -131-
lone  f6 °f metaldenyde baits and dusts or sprays containing metaldehyde are
slugs a   lng contro1 practices  (Smith 1959).  Metaldehyde is more toxic to
effect^h3 C°ntact P°is°n than as a stomach poison and exerts a greater lethal
Also  mr^H^  material ls applied to surfaces that are traversed by the slugs,
ha-ifl fv a!dehyde in dusts or sprays has been more generally effective than in
baits (Howitt and Cole 1962).
                                                                            re-
     Weather conditions at time of treatment and following treatment affect
suits.  Low dosages of the toxicant, metaldehyde, that immobilizes slugs and
causes excessive slime production and results in desiccation during a period  of
low_humidity will be more effective than high dosages applied during rainy
periods and high humidity (Howitt and Cole 1962).  Effectiveness of baits"
containing mesurol is influenced less by weather (Getzin 1965).

     Discrepancies have occurred in the assessment of efficacy of candidate mol-
luscicides by various workers using different techniques, different test species
and with different objectives  (Judge 1969).  Laboratory bioassays can give only
an indication of which materials should be subjected to the more realistic
rigors of field evaluation  (Judge 1969).

     Effectiveness of a given bait is governed by the quantity consumed before
paralysis sets in, there being a balance between a concentration which would
produce a sublethal dose and that which would be repellent (Cole 1967).
Increasing the attractiveness of a bait as by addition of beer also increases
its effectiveness.  Longer lasting baits by use  of inert plastic foam instead
of the conventional milled wheat bran are also indicated  (Smith and Boswell
1970).


     Crop and Location:—For the preliminary tests with baits to determine toxi-
city of a chemical to slugs, mix the chemical with a bait and present this bait
to the animal either in the laboratory  or in the plots of the growing crop.   The
results depend on toxicity of the chemical, on the palatability of the bait
mixture, and on the feeding activity of the test animal.

     The technique involving the direct introduction of a poison into the slug's
alimentary canal provides a method for  determining the LD 50 of any given
chemical (Hunter and Johnson 1970).  However, such chemicals may be of no
value as a molluscicide unless it can be incorporated into an attractive bait.
Attractiveness of bran in baits has been long recognized  but not fully under-
stood (Judge 1972).  Attractiveness of  bran is short-lived because of molds
(Getzin 1965) .  Use of inert carriers such as plastic foam soaked  in  the  toxicant
and an attractant such as beer may lead to longer lasting slug  baits  (Smith
and Boswell 1970) .

     Granular formulations or sprays containing  candidate molluscicides
should be distributed over flats of young peas and 20 adult  D.  reticulation or
other test species caged on each flat.  Dead and living  slugs and  damaged
pea plants should be counted at the end of one week  (Judge 1972).  A  candidate
bait in a petri dish can also be tested in a flat of  caged'peas or  other  suitable
host (Smith and Boswell 1970).  Crowell (1967) employed wooden  boxes  45.7 x
24.2 x 8.9 cm (18 x 9.5 x 3.5 in.) with covered  refuge and open arena for
laboratory testing of candidate molluscicides.

-------
                                  -132-
     Field tests may be conducted on a sod field where slug populations are
uniformly distributed.  The area should be divided into plots approximately
5 m (16.4 ft.) wide and 15 m (49.2 ft) long and separated from contiguous
plots by a cultivated strip 1 m (3.28 ft.) wide to prevent slug migration.
The treatments should be arranged in a randomized block design and with 4
replications.  Granules can be applied broadcast with standard equipment
(Judge 1972).  Molluscicide baits can be applied at 1 to 5 m (3.28 to 16.4
ft.) intervals in similar plots.  Results of efficiency are determined by
placing four or more 30 cm (1 ft.) square boards on the soil at intervals
in each plot and making weekly counts of slugs that congregate beneath.

     Greenhouse plots of tomatoes, cucumbers, lettuce, radishes, or cress
should be arranged for testing the most appropriate molluscicide formulations
resulting from the program outlined above.


     Experimental Design:—Slugs may be collected from the infested crop
area or reared in laboratory cultures (Judge 1969) .  Include from 5 to 20
slugs for each material and dosage rate in each series of tests that should be
replicated 4 or more times.

     Each series of tests should include (a) a known effective treatment as a
standard and  (b) no treatment.
      Application and  Equipment:—Granular  baits  can be  distributed on the soil
 surface by hand.   Sprays  can be applied with  hand-pumped  compressed air
 sprayers operating at 2.1-4.2 kg/cm (30-60 psi)  or  commercial equipment
 adaptable for this use.

      Greenhouse compartments or plots  in the  commercial growing crop that are
 at least 5 m (16.2 ft.)  square  should  be used for  greenhouse tests of baits,
 granules, or ground sprays.

      Avoid applications  to  the  growing crop.
     Sampling:—Make counts of dead and living slugs in the areas near bait
stations.

     Make weekly or semi-weekly counts of living slugs that congregate under
30 cm (1 ft.) square boards placed 4 per plot beginning with a pretreatment
count.  This method can be used in tests with baits or ground treatments with
granules,  dusts, or sprays.

     If damage has been allowed to progress in the test plots, record number
and weight of damaged tomato fruits and rate foliage iniurv on cucumber, radish.
cress, and lettuce plants as per cent loss from slug feeding.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.

-------
                                   -133-
                             Beferences
Crowell  ft u   n QA-?
       '  • •   J.yb/.  Slug and snail control with experimental poison baits.
     J- Econ.  Entomol.   60:1048-50.

Getzin, L.W   iqp,q   n     -i
      f     ' ,      '  Control of the gray garden slug with bait formulations
          carbamate molluscicide.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.   58:158-59.

Howxtt  A J   and  S.G. Cole.  1962.  Chemical control of slugs affecting
     55-320-258 and strawberries in the Pacific Northwest.  J.  Econ.  Entomol.


Hunter, P.J., and  D.L. Johnston.  1970.  Screening carbamates for toxicity
     against slugs.  J. Econ. Entomol.  63:305-06.

Judge, F.D.  1969.  Preliminary screening of candidate molluscicides.
     J. Econ.  Entomol.  62:1393-97.

Judge, F.D., and R.J. Ruhr.  1972.  Laboratory and field screening of granular
     formulations  of candidate molluscicides.  J. Econ. Entomol.   65:242-55.

Smith, F.F.  1959.  Control  of Insect  Pests of Greenhouse Vegetables.
     USDA Agric. Handbook  #142.  25 pp.

Smith, F.F., and A.L. Boswell.   1970.  New baits and attractants  for  slugs.
     J. Econ.  Entomol.  63:1919-22.
Spider Mites

     In northern greenhouses  the  two-spotted  spider mite, Tetranychus urticae
Koch, is most common; but  the carmine  spider  mite, T. cinnabarinus (Boisduval) ,
may also be involved.  The latter  is a southern species that is often
transported on plants shipped to  northern  growers.

     These mites cause severe stippling injury, bronzing, drying of foliage,
and extensive webbing over the entire  plant.  Thousands of mites in search of
food may accumulate on tips of shoots, plant  stakes, or hang in festoons of
webs from the foliage.

     Spider mite infestations are  more severe during spring and summer seasons
when temperatures are higher.  A  generation may be completed in 9 days in summer:
but, at lower temperatures of fall and winter, from 12 to 16 days or longer
are required.  The developmental  stages of spider mites consist of eggs  (5 days),
6-legged protonymphs  (3 days) , quiescent (2-3 days), 8-legged  deutonymphs  (3
days) ,  quiescent (2-3 days),  and  adults which may live and lay eggs for 2 to
4 weeks.  Most acaricides  act against  only the active stages - protonymphs,
deutonymphs,' and adults—and  require several  applications at regular intervals
to reduce the population.   So-called ovicides may be more strictly interpreted
as larvicides or prenatal  ovicides (Henneberry et al. 1961).

     Tepp, sulfotepp, malathion,  dichlorvos,  and parathion in  aerosols are
effective against the active  stages.   Parathion is the most effective because
of its residual action, and less  frequent  applications are required.  Two  appli-
cations of parathion at 7  to  10 day intervals are effective.   Several weekly
applications of the other  materials may be necessary.

-------
                                  -134-
     Spider mite strains vary widely in their susceptibility to acaricides
(Smith and Fulton 1951,  Taylor and Smith 1956, Henneberry et al. 1961).

     The level of resistance in the mite strain used in testing candidate
acaricides may be evaluated by leaf dip or slide dip methods (Walker et al.
1973).


     Crop and Location:—For preliminary tests to determine levels of resis-
tance in the test strain, lima beans in 10 cm (4 inch) pots are satisfactory
host plants.

     Tomato or cucumber plants are grown in pots or containers and infested
with mites by pinning leaf pieces from the test colony on 2 or more leaves of
each test plant.


     Experimental Design:—Susceptibility or resistance of an unknown mite
strain may be determined by dipping infested beans in primary leaf stage and
held in bottles of nutrient solution.  Include 4 replicates per treatment and
100 or more mites with each concentration of test chemical (Walker et al. 1973).
Ovicides should be tested against eggs and adult females as outlined by
Henneberry  et al. (1961).

     Groups of 4 or more tomato or cucumber plants grown in pots and infested
with mites by pinning on leaves from the test colony for use in sprays applied
with a knapsack sprayer or for spacing among other plants in greenhouse units
28.3m   (1000 ft. ) or larger houses for testing aerosols, mists, and
combustible powders.

     Each formulation should be compared with a standard formulation of
known performance and with untreated check.

     See Leafminers for other details.

     After the minimum effective treatment has been determined, make a
series of scheduled applications in commercial greenhouses to determine
efficiency of control and effect on crop.


     Application and Equipment:—See statement under Leafminers.


     Sampling:—In preliminary tests involving beans with primary leaves,
make 24 hour posttreatment count of adult females and immature mites on
treated and untreated leaves.  Mites that drop from plants, after treatment
with some chemicals, should be recorded from papers placed beneath treated
plants.

     Mortality of spider mites on infested tomato or cucumber plants can be
determined by examining leaflets or leaf discs cut with leaf punch or cork borer.
Each sample should include 10 leaf discs or comparable number of leaflets
taken at random from each replicate that involves 100 to 500 mites.  The first
sample should be taken 24 hours posttreatment.  Later samples at 3, 5 and 7
days posttreatment may be necessary to determine residual activity of test com-
pound.  In houses receiving a series of treatments, make weekly samplings of
discs or leaves to determine decline of mite population compared to untreated
checks.

-------
                                    -135-
posttre   mite lnjury ratings of 1-5 on cucumber or tomato at 1 and 7 days
with   atment'  Fully describe each category in rating scheme and compare
     Pr
plant Pi°?ress of in:iury on untreated plants.  Make periodic evaluations of
of cjrh^V^    m mite feedinS  and phytotoxicity in houses receiving a series
or scneduled treatments.
     Analysis _and_JRgEorting_of  Data: -See  statement under Leaf miners .


                              References

Henneberry,  T.J.,  E.A.  Taylor,  and A.L. Boswell.   1961.  The effect of Tedion
     on the  eggs  and  larvae of  three strains  of  the two-spotted spider mite,
     Tetranyohus  telanus.   J.  Eoon.  Fntomol.  54:168-9.

Taylor, E.A.,  and F.F.  Smith.   1956.   Transmission of resistance between strains
     of two-spotted spider mites.   J.  Eoon. Entomol.  49:858-9.

Walker, W.F. ,  A.L.  Boswell, and F.F.  Smith.   1973.  Resistance of spider mites
     to acaricides:  Comparison of slide  dip  and leaf dip methods.  J. Econ.
     Entomol.   66(2) :549-50.

Smith, F.F.,  and  R.A.  Fulton.   1951.   Two-spotted spider mite resistant to
     aerosols.  J.  Eoon.  Entomol.   44(2) : 229-33.
 Tomato Pinworm

     The  tomato  pinworm,  Ke-ifeTia lycopevs'icella (Busck) ,  has  a  long history of
 sporadically  infesting greenhouse tomatoes in northern states  and  is a regular
 pest on greenhouse tomatoes as well as field grown tomatoes  in warmer parts of
 the country.

     The  tomato  pinworm does not survive out-of-doors in northern  states but
 infests field grown tomatoes near greenhouses where infestations persist from
 year to year.  It  is transported to new areas on infested tomato plants or in
 fruits or  in  used  containers.

     Larvae make blotch mines  in leaves, feed in growing tips  and  flower buds,
 and enter  the fruit through pinholes under the calyx of ripening fruit.
 Effective  control  efforts should be directed toward the insect before  it invades
 the fruit  where  it is not only invulnerable to insecticide applications but
 causes the greatest damage to  the tomato crop.


     Crop  and Location;—Select a variety of tomato commonly grown in commercial
 greenhouses.   Plants should be grown in containers and under isolation to  prevent
 unwanted  infestation with pinworms or other insects.

     Less  desirable, for preliminary tests, is the selection of plots in infested
 greenhouses where  active flying adults can reinfest treated as well as untreated
 plants.

-------
                                   -136-
     Experimental Design:—Groups of plants infested with 50-100 or more insects
for each treatment should  be replicated three or more times.  Each series of
tests should include comparable groups of plants that receive (a) a known
effective treatment as standard and (b) no treatment.  Treated and untreated
groups of plants should be isolated to prevent post-treatment reinfestation.


     Application and Equipment:—Expose plants for one to two days to egg-laying
adults in a cage or greenhouse compartment that contains infested plants.

     Application of the test materials should be made to groups of plants prior
to egg hatching to determine their potential for destroying larvae before they
penetrate the leaves or fruit.  Residual action of test materials in sprays,
dusts, aerosols and some fumigants might be effective.

     To test the effect of materials against larvae within leaf mines, make
application to plants (1)  when the larvae are in their early instars and the
mines are small and (2) against more mature larvae when mines are larger.
Insecticides in sprays, dusts, aerosols and fumigants may penetrate the thin
plant tissue over the larvae.

     To test the materials against adults, suspend screen cages in duplicate,
each containing 5 to 10 moths, in greenhouses prior to treatment with test
fumigants, aerosols or dusts.

     After specific action of test chemical has been determined as above,
series of treatments at timed intervals can be made to plots or preferably
entire sections of commercial greenhouses.

     In all tests, include comparable untreated check plants or plots and a
known standard chemical treatment as a basis for comparing efficiency of test
material.
     Sampling:—Against hatching larvae on treated plants, make observations
on mines that develop indicating larvae that survived the treatment.  Make direct
counts of older larvae in mines or adults in cages one day after treatment and
7 days after treatment.

     In tests conducted on the growing crop in commercial greenhouses where
2 to 8 or more weekly applications may be made, (a) records can be made on
dead larvae in mines, (b) mines per leaf on treated plants, and (c) fruits with
pinworm injuries (Lindquist 1975).  Similar records should be made on
replicated, untreated plots.


     Analysis and Reporting of Data:—See statement under Leafminers.


                              References

Anderson, L.D., and E.G. Walker.  1944.  Tomato pinworm control in the greenhouse
     J. Econ. Entomol.  37:264-68.

-------
                                    -137-
Lindquist, R.K.   1975.   Insecticides  and  insecticide  combinations  for control of
     tomato pinworm  larvae  on greenhouse- tomatoes:  A progress report.
     Greenhouse  Veg.  Res.:   Pes.  Swnrn.   82.   OARDC, Wooster, Ohio.

Neiswander, R.B.   1950.   The tomato pinworm.   Ohio Agric.  Exp. Sta. Pes.
     Bull.  702.

Thomas,  C.A.   1932.   The tomato pinworm Gnorimoschema lycopersicella  (Busck) ,
     a new pest  in Pennsylvania.   J.  Econ.  Entomol.   25:137-8.

Thomas,  C.A.   1936.   Status of the tomato pinworm Gnorimo^schema  lycopersicella
      (Busck)  in  Pennsylvania.  J. Econ. Entomol.   29:313-17.

-------